JP7150331B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine capable of executing an effect using a movable member in relation to a game.

A gaming machine is known that includes a movable member having a light-emitting element and an effect control means for controlling an effect using the movable member (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2017-144136 A

However, it cannot be said that the presentation using the movable members executed in the conventional game machine is highly interesting.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of presentation using movable members.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
In a game machine capable of executing an effect using a movable member in relation to a game,
Equipped with a display device that can display effects,
the movable member is capable of performing a predetermined operation and capable of emitting light;
The light emission mode of the movable member differs between a first period during which the movable member performs the predetermined operation and a second period preceding the first period and continuing from the first period,
The movable member slightly moves during the second period ,
In the second period, the light emission color of the movable member and the display color of the display device are of the same system .

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest in presentation using the movable member.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change/confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead big hit determination process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining fall lottery processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a figure explaining the case where there are multiple types of small hit types. It is a figure explaining a small hit design. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining a small hit design substitution production. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining role object production|presentation. It is a figure explaining light emission production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the specific production|presentation using the production|presentation means.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the game machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a batted ball launching device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 containing a performance button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. do. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

A center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 can operate downward from the state shown in FIG.
A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches 35a (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that provides a condition for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c, but the normal variable winning device The movable member of 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted “C” shape by opening.
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) is provided to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area. ) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, inside the upper grand prize winning port, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of playing balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), and the number detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e. By matching the number of game balls (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it is possible to confirm that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically until this confirmation is completed is designed not to open a new upper grand prize opening.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving forward and backward (slides) of an opening/closing member (not shown). The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening.
In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for a special figure 1 variation display game composed of a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) etc. and a special figure 2 variation display A special figure 2 display for the game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52, a first memory display unit 53 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and an LED lamp It is provided with a second storage display unit 54 for notifying the number of starting memories of the configured special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also has a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of times the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed), and the number of rounds that are advantageous to the player between left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for informing how to beat (a way to beat corresponding to the game state), and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. there is In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
In addition, a normal pattern display unit 58 that displays the normal pattern fluctuation display game, a memory display unit 59 for notifying the number of start memories of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the time saving state occurrence A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked. It is configured to display that it is fluctuating, and to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 stores the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51. , lights up (blinks).
The second storage display unit 54 stores the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52, with a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off and lighting (blinking).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when the special game state is not in progress, and turns off the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps or the like. For example, when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off and left-handed When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of a big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of a big hit is a high probability state (variable probability state). In the case of , all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 has an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, etc. A normal power supply unit. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. processing takes place. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball outlet switch 38e disposed in the first special variable prize winning device 38, and an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing. , an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal with a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. be done. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball discharge switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10, and the detection signal of the game machine. The detection signal of the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10, etc., and the detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12, etc. of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position, and the game machine is powered on while operating (pressing down) the RAM initialization switch 112 to set the probability setting value. can be changed, and the probability set value can be changed by operating (depressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 during the probability set value change mode. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device. Although displayed in 153, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 , 126 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38 and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and general electrical solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output, and the currently selected This is a port for outputting display data of the performance display device 153 that displays probability setting values.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information on the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138 c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 , and the external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. DC 5V is supplied from the power supply device 400 to the fifth driver 138e as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V can be driven.
Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the gate The switch 34a uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. It is In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. The function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps and motors. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

FIG. 5 shows the probability of a big hit, the probability of a fall, the probability of a small win, and the distribution probability of the types of big wins when winning a big win. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

The value of the jackpot probability (probability value), which is the probability of a big hit (first special result), is common to special figures 1 and 2, and the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state are respectively. The probability values are as shown in FIG. 5(a).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the same probability value is assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the high probability state. May be assigned a value. That is, the probability value in the high-probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. May be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of steps is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple steps. Also, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low-probability state may not be switchable in multiple stages.

In addition, the distribution of effects and the like may be made different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low-probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, six probability setting values ("setting 1 ” to “Setting 6”) are assigned, for example, three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 1” to “Setting 3”) are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, "Setting 4" to "Setting 6") may be unused.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being (V passage), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning a drop lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 5(b).
In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 5(c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the game state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate. In the present embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 and not in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but is not limited to this. may be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Also, if a small hit is provided for both special 1 and special 2, the small hit probability may be the same for special 1 and special 2, or special 2 is more likely than special 1. may be higher, and the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 5(d) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
There are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that game balls will flow into a specific area (variability operation area) and that it is likely to become a high probability state (variability state) after the special game state ends. , Ordinary means that the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (variable probability operating area) is low and it is difficult to become a high probability state (variable probability state) after the special game state ends.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed such that winning balls are actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). can be

Also, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is lower than that of the variable probability big win, but the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is higher than that of the normal big win.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, the high probability state occurs if the game balls flow into the specific area.

FIGS. 6(a) to 6(c) show opening modes in each round for each jackpot type. Details of the open mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the 10R variable probability big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed to open a specific area (variable probability operation area). Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area). After the second round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the 4R variable probability big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed to open a specific area (variable probability operation area). From the 2nd to 4th rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the long opening without V is performed, and the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened after the 5th round V-less short-circuit opening is performed in which the specific area is not opened. The non-V short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the big winning opening is lower than the non-V long opening. That is, long opening without V is an opening mode in which winning balls are actually generated, and short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning balls are actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the 10R normal jackpot, in the first round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variable operation area) is opened. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onwards, a V-less long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
It is only the long opening with V and short opening with V that are performed in the first round that the game ball can flow into the specific area (probability variable operation area). That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which game balls may flow into the specific area, is the first round. Note that the specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the specific round may be multiple times such as the first round and the fifth round.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t11) with the start of the round, and a predetermined number (for example, 9 ) is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t12). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening starts (t12), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t13), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), in long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and game balls cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retreats from the specific area and game balls can flow in. becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 milliseconds from the start of the round (t32). After 100 milliseconds have elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the winning game ball will flow into the specific area immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened.

After 200 milliseconds from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after 2700 milliseconds have passed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and either the opening possible time of 25000 milliseconds has passed or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls have won. When the conditions are established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t39), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t41), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42). . In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Further, after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for the second time (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned ON for a predetermined period of time (t36-t37, t38-t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d is enabled (t36). Since the second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, game balls almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is variable, it will almost certainly be in a high-probability state.

In addition, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept ON for a predetermined period of time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43). It is also possible to flow into the specific area for the game ball that has been played. In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining balls in the upper large winning opening. If all the balls are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41) to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If the lever solenoid 38f is not completely discharged within the above period and the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF when the discharge is completed. is terminated, the specific area switch 38d is disabled.
In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON (t43), the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON ends (t43). As a result, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation ends. In this case, after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43) and 100 milliseconds elapses, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t44).

As shown in FIG. 7(c), in the short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if game balls remain in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening has passed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. , and the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled. Also, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end (t62) of the period during which the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF at the end (t62) of the period during which the lever solenoid 38f is ON. After 100 milliseconds have passed since the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t63).

Also, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variation winning device 38 in long opening with V shown in FIG. 7(b), and the first special variation in short opening with V shown in FIG. 7(c) The opening of the winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time that allows the first special variable winning device 38 to win at least one game ball.

As shown in FIG. 7(d), in short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and a predetermined number (for example, nine ) is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare for the predetermined number of winnings, which is the closing condition, to occur, and in most cases the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening starts (t72), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t73), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

In addition, FIG. 6(d) shows an opening mode in the second special game state (special game state based on a small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small win fanfare time is started, and when the small win fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, and the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) game balls win a prize, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. After that, the small winning remaining ball processing time is started, and when the small winning remaining ball processing time ends, the small winning ending time starts, and when the small winning ending time ends, the second special game state ends. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of opening modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state. .

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, and a second specific game state ST3. In addition, as the special game state, there is a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the main in the game state A main starting area which is a starting area to be aimed at, a main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and a shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Also, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST1. .

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (when there is V passage), it becomes a high probability state. In addition, there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. It is a state that there is a reduction in time to shorten the fluctuation time of. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game in the state with the general electric support (normal pattern probability) is the same probability as the state without the general electric support (normal probability). Not limited to, in the state where there is a general electric support, the general pattern probability can be set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without general electric support means that the normal variable prize winning device 37 is open, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shorter than the state with general electric support. be.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a shorter time state than in the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variable winning device 37 is hit to the right. It is advantageous for the player to aim at and play the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the case of this embodiment, the special figure 1 small hit probability is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing so is high, small hits occur with high frequency in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, the state without general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win. Also, in a special game state based on a small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6(d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. It wins the device 37 and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. - 特許庁Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur with high frequency, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the first specific game state ST2, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. It flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 without winning the device 37 . Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur frequently and the number of balls possessed by the player increases, so the production mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

Among these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 because of the general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a state with a high probability, and furthermore, it is a state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small wins. favorable situation.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, completing the specified number of games, and winning the fall lottery, which is the lottery for transition to the low-probability state. . Basically, the probability variable jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific area (variability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch When it is detected at 38d (when there is V passage), the transition to the first specific game state ST2 is made after the end of the first special game state. On the other hand, when the variable probability big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage case), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special game state It shifts to the second specific game state ST3). On the other hand, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special game state It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34 and a general winning opening 35. , the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and enter the game area 32 is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning Players can aim to win a prize through the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general winning port 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ) If it is less than the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal pattern display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. The normal figure display unit 58 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and the result is displayed. may be configured.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 58 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electrical solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) Along with storing, a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as first start memory and second start memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is the first memory display unit 53 (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 , and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (jackpot). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes first execution control means for performing control. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 performs the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area). It constitutes second execution control means for performing execution control.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display device 51 constitutes a first variation display means capable of displaying the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 . Also, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100, after the end of the jackpot game state (first special game state), a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

Also, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41 displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) variably. A display game is to be run. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, the game machine 10 may not be equipped with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is 0), but when it is in the normal game state A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game in FIG. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting the left hand and aiming at the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁
The long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Also, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, a long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 9, first, processing for inhibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs, is processed. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the first 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X10; Y). X11), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y), the power failure inspection in the RWM It is determined whether the value of area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. That is, when the game machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, so the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays a display as shown in FIG. 13(h). After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), the probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b A notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed is provided by outputting a voice by
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, the processes of steps X29 and X30 are performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N), that is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the process proceeds to step X41 to recover from the power failure. Perform the processing when recovery is normal.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, a command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X37). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b The fact that the probability setting value is being confirmed is notified by outputting a voice by

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, when the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 milliseconds. However, since it is necessary to output the security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, the judgment is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at the time of power-on), but the state (current state) read at the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34). Returning, if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. During the period from the interrupt enabling process (step X32) to the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). . In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set performs power failure recovery processing (step X41) for saving initial values at the time of power failure recovery in areas to be initialized (for example, power failure inspection area, checksum area, and area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command etc. Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Without doing, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. It should be noted that in step X44, the stack area and the unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game with the effect number information command and general electric support, etc. is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure RWM as initial value (start value) (step X48), interrupt is permitted (step X49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number updating process of step X50, the interrupt prohibiting process (step X51) is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54). If the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process Return to (step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

The initial value random number update process in step X50 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid the execution of the random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. It has the advantage of being converted

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61 ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. and an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the above, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , the lever solenoid 38f, the general electric solenoid 37c), and the like (step X105). When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106), random number update processing 1 (step X107), and random number update processing 2 (step X108) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), a starting port switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 . Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing processing regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, and the processing related to the normal figure variation display game The normal figure game process (step X114) is performed, and the segment LED that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and displays the special figure variation display game and the segment LED that displays various information related to the game is driven to display the desired content. Edit processing (step X115) is performed.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring processing (step X118) for checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and determining whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this probability setting change/confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X131).
If the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM (current probability setting value) Value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the display shown in FIGS. 13A to 13F is performed on the performance display device 153. FIG.
On the other hand, if the value in the area for the probability set value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), the light-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133) to display the probability set value. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 displays a display as shown in FIG. 13(g).

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type displays) arranged side by side. During the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays indicates the current probability setting value, and the remaining 7-segment displays indicate "SET " is shown.
Specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1". When "1" is displayed on the segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "1", the current probability setting value is "setting 2". As shown, "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "2", the current probability setting value is "setting 3". As shown in FIG. 13(c), "3" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "3", the current probability setting value is "set 4", "4" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13(d). Since the probability setting value is "setting 5", "5" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. , the current probability set value is "set 6", so "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13(f). Further, when the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG. 13(g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. Probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step X135). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). At step X136, security signal ON data is output regardless of whether the security signal control timer has timed out. Therefore, during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are set), the security signal continues to be output.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set ends the probability setting change/confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process being executed is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on of the game machine 10. It is determined whether it is confirmation processing (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). At step X139, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the previous input process (step X103). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is changed from 0 to The range of 5 is updated by +1 (step X140), and the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change/confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5(a), "setting 1" to "setting 6" are applied to three types of probability values (probability values in a low-probability state and probability values in a high-probability state). However, for example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three types of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the RWM probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0-2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the game machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability set value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with .
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between a shift operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, if the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode) continues even during the probability set value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch If the button 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input processing of the timer interrupt processing (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input processing is OFF, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input processing is OFF. When the state is the ON state, an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, the input processing immediately before power-off is the previous input processing, and the input processing immediately after power-on is the current input processing. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is highly likely to be the OFF state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge ) is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and X140 is performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation, Inconvenience may arise that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the processes of steps X139 and X140 are not performed in the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. It is assumed that As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the shift to the probability set value change mode) operation), the input signal (rising edge) is ignored, so that unintended updating can be prevented.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and storage means for storing one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned. (game control device 100 (RAM 111C)), and a mode for shifting to a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the transition means (game control device 100) and the operation of the second operation unit in the probability set value change mode, the probability set value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM ) for changing the setting change means (game control device 100), and the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value change mode, and the second for changing the probability setting value The operation of the operation unit (change operation) is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the time the game machine is powered on even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit that is being performed.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the gaming machine is powered on continues even after the mode is shifted to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 14 shows the startup switch monitoring process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hardware random number acquisition process (step X492) is performed. Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493).

Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting entrance winning prize is set based on the winning to the starting winning mouth 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether it is in the special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (Step X494). And, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X494; Y), it moves to step X497. In addition, if it is not during special figure low probability & time saving (step X494; N), prepare a right hitting instruction notification command (step X495) and perform production command setting processing (step X496).

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. During a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player, and a starting prize-winning port 36 that is designed not to win unless left-handed is in a specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected in the inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the starting port 1 (step X497), and perform the special figure starting port switch common processing (step X498). Next, a winning monitoring table for starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), hardware random number acquisition processing (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is starting entrance winning information set in the case (step X501).

When the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. It should be noted that, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the starter winning information is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game balls can win (step X502). Transition. On the other hand, if the utility power is not in operation (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the utility power fraud is occurring (step X503).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the utility power fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. In addition, when it is not during the general electric fraud occurrence (step X503; N), prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 (step X504), and perform the special figure start port switch common processing (step X505) to end the starting port switch monitoring process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
FIG. 15 shows the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps X498, X505) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

In this special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting opening switch to be monitored is sent to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start signal output count area of RWM (step X524), and the special figure hold (start Memory) number, that is, the number of special figure pending (starting memory) to be updated determines whether it is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, the value after the update is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

And when the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 (Step X526), save the target starting gate winning flag (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, the falling lottery random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in the falling lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X534), and if there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), a small winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X536). .

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538), which is a prefetch process, is performed. Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step X539), perform the production command setting process (step X540), and perform the special figure starting opening switch common process finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number is used as a first start memory to store up to a predetermined upper limit number. Forms a starting memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and uses the predetermined random number as a second start memory to store up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 constitute starting memory means.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 show the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538) in the special figure start opening switch common process described above. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether it is during the big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and when it is during the big hit (step X541; Y), special figure reservation information determination End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X541; N), the starting opening prize flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is performed. (step X542).

In the case of winning the starting slot 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform prefetching. On the other hand, if it is not a winning prize to the starting port 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether it is in the special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step X543). And, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, no prefetching is performed. On the other hand, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; N), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X544).

When not in the special figure high probability (step X544; N), it moves to step X548. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the fall lottery random number value prepared in step X532 of the special figure start opening switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit depending on whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (low-probability-hit-hit judgment value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X553).

In the case of not winning a prize to the starting port 2 (step X553; N), set stop symbol information of a loss (step X558), and shift to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), small hit determination processing (step X554) for determining whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value or not. I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step X556), and a small hit design prepared in step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X557), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step X555; N), set stop design information of losing (step X558), stop design information acquired at step X552 or X557, or set at step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

After that, prepare a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information (step X560), and effect command setting processing (step X561).
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the prediction big hit determination processing (step X563) determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starter switch common processing is performed in step X530. stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is obtained (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X564; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X567).

In the case of not winning the starting slot 2 (step X567; N), set stop symbol information (step X572) and proceed to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), small hit determination processing (step X568) for determining whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value or not. I do. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step X570), and a small hit design prepared in step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step X571), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a small hit (step X569; N), stop symbol information of loss is set (step X572), and it is determined whether or not special figure high probability is in progress (step X573).

And when it is not in special figure high probability (step X573; N), it transfers to step X575. On the other hand, when it is in the special figure high probability (step X573; Y), the stop design information acquired at step X566 or X571 is stored in the design information area where the stop design information is saved at step X559, or at step X572 The set stop pattern information is overwritten and saved (step X574). It should be noted that the stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching of variation patterns and the like.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576) is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, every time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result determined by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined by the jackpot high probability determination value are sent to the effect control device 300. be done.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. I do.
Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X579), perform the production command setting process (step X580), and determine the special figure reservation information. End the process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target, and the lookahead stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target A pattern command and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加As a result, the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether or not it will fall (whether the probability state of the big hit shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, etc. , Variation pattern type) judgment result (prefetching result) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, especially displayed on the display device 41 By changing the decorative special figure start memory display to be displayed, it is possible to inform the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means capable of determining the result of the variable display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). form a means of prejudgment. The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Look-ahead big hit determination process]
FIG. 18 shows the look-ahead big hit determination process (steps X549, X563) in the above-described special figure reservation information determination process. In this look-ahead big-hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big-hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big-hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). If the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step X584), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the judgment flag is not the high probability judgment flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is the low probability judgment flag, the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step X587), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment process ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 19 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). The special figure 1 variation display game is performed when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is the second special result (minor win) during execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the second special game state is executed. , is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display Perform processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 suspension flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is suspended, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Without performing, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

In the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game, first, a special game state is executed based on whether the special figure 2 is a big win/minor win, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big win or a small win. It is determined whether it is inside (step Y101). And when it is during the big hit/minor hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y104. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 big hit/small hit is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being a big win is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game result is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the big hit or the small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process which will be described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. A special game state is generated based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

Then, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). Then, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. Also, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is branched. The special-figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y106). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (step Y108).

At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure Performs special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing processing during FIG. 1 fluctuation.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big win, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, setting each kind of big win. Processing during special figure 1 display (step Y111) for setting fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the big winning round is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and special figure 1 processing A big winning hole remaining ball process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the big win end process is performed.
At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) I do.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step Y116), perform symbol variation control processing related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step Y117), lever solenoid A lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
20 and 21 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the timer interrupt processing described above. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether a special game state is being executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (step Y131). And when it is during the big hit of special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y134. Also, when the special figure 1 jackpot is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) is performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 2 game processing, a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. Based on the fact that the specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special game state is performed.

Then, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). Then, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. Also, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (step Y136).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The variable timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for a specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is stored in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y140), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is performed (step Y141).

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Performs special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) for setting information necessary for performing FIG. 2 fluctuation processing.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Processing during special figure 2 display (step Y144) for setting fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the large winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big winning round is the final round, processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, and special figure 2 processing are performed. A big winning hole remaining ball processing (step Y147) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. In the small hit fanfare processing (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for .
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y150) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. conduct.

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or the small winning end. A small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step Y153), perform symbol variation control processing related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step Y154), lever solenoid A lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), set "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), end the special figure 1 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the instruction to hit left has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), effect command setting processing (step Y204) is performed, and a left-handed instruction notification flag is set. (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is designed to be cleared when the specific game state ends, and thereby the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206), and when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), and perform the production command setting process (step Y208). . After that, a special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) for setting information about the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared (step Y210 ), effect command setting processing (step Y211) is performed. In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y210) for preparing the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 pending number based on the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number minus 1 from the number. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y212), and effect command setting processing (step Y213) is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit and the end of the special game state. In addition, it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but in that case the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), set "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), end the special figure 2 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 2 can start fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222).

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform the production command setting process (step Y224). . After that, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) for setting information related to special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226 ), effect command setting processing (step Y227) is performed. In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y226) to prepare the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 2 pending number based on the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 2 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 2 pending number minus 1 from the number. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y230). Since the special figure 2 variable display game is started here, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process shift setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 usual process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y232). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N), customer waiting Perform processing related to setting the state. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y232; N), if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y) or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y234; Y) goes to step Y238.

In the processing for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y235), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect in accordance with the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. In addition, the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the effect corresponding to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
FIG. 24(a) shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y241). Next, load a random number from the RWM special figure 1 drop lottery random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step Y242), and clear the special figure 1 drop lottery random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 (Step Y243), a drop lottery process (step Y244) is performed to draw a lottery for the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the losing information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop pattern (symbol information) is performed. Design setting processing (step Y246) is performed. Then, to perform a special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, and to refer to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of is set (step Y248).

After that, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game Processing (step Y250) is performed, and time reduction variation frequency update processing (step Y251) is performed. Next, set "1" for special figure 1 fluctuation processing as the processing number (step Y252), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is saved (step Y257), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank design) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y258), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing exit.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
FIG. 24(b) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) in the special figure 2 normal processing described above. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y261). Next, load a random number from the RWM special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step Y262), and clear the special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 (Step Y263), a drop lottery process (step Y264) is performed to draw a lottery for the transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the loss information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop pattern (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) it does. Then, to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern, and to refer to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of is set (step Y268).

After that, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and the variation start information setting for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game Processing (step Y270) is performed, and time shortening fluctuation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. Next, set "1" for special figure 2 fluctuating processing as the processing number (step Y272), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is saved (step Y277), the initial value (here, "0" indicating a blank design) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y278), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing exit.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 25 shows the falling lottery process (steps Y244, Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this drop lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in effect (step Y581), and if not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the drop lottery process is terminated. In addition, when the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether or not the fall lottery random number value of the object is less than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582). Winning the fall lottery means that the fall lottery random number matches the fall lottery determination value. The drop lottery determination value is a plurality of continuous values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or greater than the drop lottery lower limit determination value, which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery determination value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery determination value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the fall lottery has been won.

If the drop lottery random number is less than the drop lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the drop lottery is not won, the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the fall lottery random number value is not less than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the target fall lottery random number value is greater than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583).
If the drop lottery random number is greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the drop lottery is not won, the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the drop lottery random number is not greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (step X583; N), that is, if the drop lottery is won, a process for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the processing for transitioning to the low probability state, first, a signal regarding high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big win 2 signal is set to ON, and the big win 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF.
Then, the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and end the falling lottery process. As a result, the low-probability state and general/universal electric power non-supported state are established, and the state shifts to the normal game state. Information on the end of the high probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs processing such as changing the production mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, load a jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare it (step Y282), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step Y283).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 2, which is the jackpot decision result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed, is a jackpot (step Y284), and if it is a jackpot (step Y284; Y), the jackpot flag 1 is set. End the process. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit according to whether the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is a big hit (step Y286; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is not a big hit (step Y286; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepare it (step Y293), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0 ( step Y294).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 1, which is the jackpot decision result of the special figure 1 variation display game being executed, is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. do. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether or not the acquired big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 is overwritten with the small hit information. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 27 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y285 and Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is judged whether it is in the special figure high probability (step Y313).

Then, if it is in the special high probability (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y314), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step Y316). Also, if it is not in the special high probability (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y315), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit judgment It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 28 shows the small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y323), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step Y324), and perform the small hit judgment process. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step Y332). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 1 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. . These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the losing stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure The 1-stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same process as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area (reservation number 1 ) to load the jackpot pattern random number (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop design save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y365), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y366). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 2 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. . These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number A small hit design random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y376). Next, a special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step Y377), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design saving area (step Y378). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

Also, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern withdrawal area (step Y380), and the losing stop pattern pattern is a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, prepare a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and save it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373), and the special figure 2 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100, based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) the first change display game It constitutes a first decision means capable of making a decision before the start of . In addition, the game control device 100, based on the second start memory stored in the second start memory means, stores the result and the change mode information of the second change display game (special figure 2 change display game) in the second change display game. It forms a second decision means which can be decided before the start of . Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to is placed at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information about the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second decision in the normal state (normal game state) the variation time that can be determined by the means as the variation time of the second variation display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means; Become.

Then, the information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the information about the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, according to the determined variation pattern Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information about the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information about the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing.
Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole special figure 2 game processing.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, information about the fluctuation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and long fluctuation It is also possible to transmit a command only indicating that the In the case of a long variation, it is only necessary to simply perform a variable display, so there is no need to determine the performance in detail. The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the burden of control in the production control device 300 can be reduced.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern are acquired (step Y402), and the special figure It is determined whether the FIG. 1 jackpot, that is, the special-figure 1 stop pattern pattern is a jackpot stop pattern pattern (step Y403). If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reservation number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half variation (variation mode before the start of the reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, save the second half offset data in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and end the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the first half variation pattern is determined considering the number of special figure 1 reservations in the case of a loss, and the number of special figure 1 reservations is taken into consideration in the case of a big hit. A variation pattern is determined without

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step Y421). If it is not special figure low probability & no time saving (step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time shortening final variation (step Y427). Here, when the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now on is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. Also, if it is not the time reduction final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop pattern pattern are acquired. (Step Y424), the process proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now on is won, it is determined to be the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), first half offset data and second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
Also, if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). Then, if it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at low probability (step Y430), and set the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y432), and the process proceeds to step Y425.

Also, if the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half variation (variation mode before the start of the reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting process is terminated. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
Thus, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reservations.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), and the special The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, the stop pattern pattern is a lost stop pattern pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is lost (step Y454; Y), 2 byte distribution processing (step Y455 )I do. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y454; N), the distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of data capacity saving. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. Also, the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and in order to enable more diverse effects, the size for losing is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 are prepared (step Y458). Next, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y460). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 Prepare (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), and the special The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y473).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, the stop pattern pattern is a lost stop pattern pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is lost (step Y474; Y), 2 byte distribution processing (step Y475 )I do. Also, when the special figure 2 is not a deviation (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, obtain the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of sorting and prepare it (step Y477), and load the variation pattern random number 2 from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 are prepared (step Y478). Next, a sorting process (step Y479) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 Prepare (step Y484).
After that, sorting processing (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of being sorted is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting process (steps Y250, Y270) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (step Y553). Further, the second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set. In this case, the additional value is the remaining time (less than 60000 ms) after subtracting the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the specified time (here, 60000 ms) is measured. is calculated as

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Also, if the information of special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step Y559). A long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is in a normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

And, if it is not the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). In addition, when it is the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and effect command setting processing (step Y564) is executed. conduct. Next, the target pending number is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In this embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for a 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 milliseconds and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as the result of addition, and the timer is decremented by the timer interrupt processing. set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60000 ms × 10). Since the period of the timer interrupt is 4 milliseconds, up to about 262 seconds can be set with 2 bytes.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 36 shows the time reduction variation frequency update process (steps Y251, Y271) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step Y571), and when it is in the special figure high probability (step Y571; Y), time End the shortened variation count update process. Also, if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572). And, when it is not in the special figure time saving (step Y572; N), it ends the time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing. In addition, if it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572; Y), the time shortening variation frequency is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation frequency has become "0" (step Y574) .

If the time reduction variation count is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. In addition, when the number of times of time reduction fluctuation becomes "0" (step Y574; Y), a signal related to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the 2 jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , Signals related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, save the low probability number in the game state display number area (step Y577), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and save the normal figure game mode flag area Save the normal figure time saving no flag (step Y579), and end the time reduction fluctuation frequency update process.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 fluctuating process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of output times of design determination (step Y621). Then, the command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the production command setting process (step Y623) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In this embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 milliseconds is set in the case of losing, and a display time of 2000 milliseconds is set in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is lost (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y628). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the fact that the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If the special figure 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y629; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set above as the display time of special figure 2 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of special figure 1 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, the display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decoration special figure 2 is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y636), perform the production command setting process (step Y638), and perform the special figure 2 display process shift setting process 2 (step Y638).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y639), load the information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), perform the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 fluctuating process (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of output times of design determination (step Y651). Then, the command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the production command setting process (step Y653) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In this embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 msec for a loss, 600 msec for a big hit, and 136 msec for a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is lost (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y658). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, a special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670) and decoration special figure 1 is interrupted. A command is prepared (step Y671), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is resumed upon completion of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, if it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. In addition, if the special figure 1 is not being displayed during processing (step Y660; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 set above as the display time of special figure 1 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of special figure 2 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 1, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 miss pattern command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667), perform the production command setting process (step Y668), and perform the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y669).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y673), whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit Determine (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675), information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678), special figure 2 End the display process.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753), and when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variation display game A test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is ON and a special symbol 1 winning signal is ON) regarding the start of a big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y755), and effect command setting processing (step Y756) is performed. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). In addition, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y764) is performed, and the process during special figure 1 display ends.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is loss information, it is determined whether it is a high probability final change (step Y765), and if it is not a high probability final change ( In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not it is the time reduction final variation (step Y766). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and a production command Setting processing (step Y768) is performed. Next, save the probability state command (low probability) in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y769), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y770), and whether it is a small hit of special figure 2, that is, It is determined whether or not the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becoming a small hit (step Y771).

When it is during the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y771; Y), it transfers to step Y774. On the other hand, if it is not during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y771; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs left-handed hitting. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y774), save the special figure 1 normal processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. It should be noted that special figure 2 during display processing, processing equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 1 during display processing, is intended to perform the special figure 2 as a target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game A test signal (for example, condition device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) relating to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y817), and effect command setting processing (step Y818) is performed. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, a jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Furthermore, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y826) is performed, and the process during special figure 2 display ends.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). . Then, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y828), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y828; N), time It is determined whether it is a shortened final variation (step Y829). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final change (step Y828; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final change (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command Setting processing (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small win. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y834), and effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and the process during special figure 2 small winning fanfare Transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing during special figure 2 display ends.

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y843), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final change (step Y844). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command Setting processing (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y850), save the special figure 2 normal processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), special figure 2 End the display process.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device based on the second special result of the variable display game; Eggplant.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 show fanfare/interval processing (steps Y112, Y145) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare/interval processing, it is first determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game, the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 so that the special game state is started. there is

If there is no game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a game ball passing through the normal figure start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information A value (10 in this embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step Y945). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prizes won is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the continuously operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, a round command corresponding to the special prize opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot process control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot step control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot is won. A large winning opening opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the process control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. Also, when one opening is performed in one round, a big hit operation end value (2 in the case of the present embodiment) is set. Note that the initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of openings and closings in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). A lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), data for stopping the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960). Then, if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special figure 1 game processing timer area for opening the big winning opening (step Y962). On the other hand, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y960; N), that is, if it is a special figure 2 big hit, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening is opened. Time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, a signal relating to the opening start of the upper special prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening/closing member of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the upper large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the big winning opening is counted. The large winning opening count number is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare/interval process ends.

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, only the upper big winning opening (first special variation device 38) is opened, and the small In the special game state (second special game state) based on the win, only the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening mode in the first special game state may be a mode in which the upper big winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower big winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 jackpot ending process (step Y115) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data at step Y1101 does not have time reduction, the jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction at step Y1101, the jackpot end setting processing 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, a specific area passing flag is set when a game ball flows into a specific area (probability variable operating area), and when this specific area passing flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passing information. . If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passing information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1107).

If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, if it is the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108), and effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include production mode information in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, "0" relating to special figure 1 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 winning signal and the special symbol 2 winning signal are set to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and clear the special figure status area. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, the special figure variation display game can be started for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, special figure 2 game is performed after special figure 1 game processing. In order to carry out the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing with the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start processing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the game control device 100 keeps the second variable display game execution control means in the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the special game state ends. 2. Game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from becoming executable.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) in the special figure 2 game processing described above. The special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. In this special figure 2 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data at step Y1131 does not have time reduction, the jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1132) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction at step Y1131, the jackpot end setting processing 2 ( Step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passing information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1137).

If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), the process proceeds to step Y1139. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passage through the specific area (step Y1137; Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include production mode information in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, "0" relating to special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 winning signal and the special symbol 2 winning signal are set to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), save the fraud monitoring period flag in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and clear the special figure status area. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 jackpot end processing is terminated. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 46(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of no time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and not output.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and normal electric accessories 1 Set the open extended state signal to OFF.
After that, the number without working hours is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1153), and the flag without working hours is saved in the general game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, save the special figure low probability and no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and set the time reduction variation number area to 0 for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state Clear (step Y1156).

Next, a signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, the normal game state is entered.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 46(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and normal electric accessories 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, save the number of time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1163), and save the flag with time saving in the general game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, save the special figure low probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and initialize the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state Save the value (step Y1166). In this embodiment, the number of times of support is 100, so 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, it becomes the second specific game state with a special figure low probability. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big win, the right-handed hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit end setting process 3 (steps Y1105, Y1135) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of the special drawing time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON. After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is ended. This processing results in a high-probability state. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting processing 3 after the jackpot end setting processing 1, it becomes the first specific game state, and by executing the jackpot end setting processing 3 after the jackpot end setting processing 2, the special figure high probability It becomes the second specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set the specific game state which is a high probability state after the end of the first special game state. That is, the game control device 100 is a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3 with a high probability of special symbols) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game is a special result is higher than the normal state. constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating

[Processing during small win fanfare]
FIG. 48 shows the process (step Y149) during the small hit fanfare in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small-hit fanfare mid-process, first, a small-hit opening command for opening the lower big winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1203), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 in operation signal is turned ON) is the test signal Save in the output data area (step Y1206). Then, the lower large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1207), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the small The process during winning fanfare is terminated.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y152) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as a processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and clear the special figure status area ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure low probability & time saving is not in (normal game state) (step Y1337), and if it is not special figure low probability & time saving (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340 do. In addition, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (step Y1340).

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit ending process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (step Y1340; Y), a decoration special figure 1 resume command is prepared (step Y1341), and effect command setting processing (step Y1342) is performed. Thereafter, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit ending process is terminated. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variation display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 controls one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). If the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means results in a special result, the one variable display game is executed. It constitutes restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one variable display game that has been interrupted and after the special game state based on the other variable display game is completed.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 50 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc. (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sounds from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and a board effect setting process for controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, etc. (Step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (Step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 51 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 52 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C239; Y), symbolic command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Processing of variable commands]
FIG. 53 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variation-based command process, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the symbol system command process described above.

If this special figure type is undecided (step C361; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Also, if the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the design command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the design type are It is determined whether it is inconsistent (step C363).

When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated. Further, when the variation command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, winning symbols, 16R big-hit symbols, 10R big-hit symbols, small-hit symbols, and the like. The case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent means that the variation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command for the 16R jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of variation command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variable effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect corresponding to the variable command is performed (step C365).

Next, the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is set during special figure fluctuation (step C366). Here, "during special figure fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of look-ahead effects (the number of times of look-ahead execution) is not zero, the number of look-ahead effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of look-ahead effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process ends.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 54 shows the variable effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described variable command process. In this fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is reachless fluctuation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381; Y), the model code and special figure type and the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the production mode at that time are set (step C382). Note that the production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300, and naturally differs depending on the model, but here there are a normal mode, a variable probability mode, and the like. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in each mode in which the allocation rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is obtained (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the announcement effect appearing during each fluctuation (specifically, the appearance rate of each announcement effect mode) according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half advance notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not a reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. A lottery for the advance notice that appears in .

Next, the advance notice effect of the second half fluctuation is drawn by lottery. In addition, the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a combination of special patterns) in which the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of multiple rows of special figures is a big hit. is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is the variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the late notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table. Then, referring to the second half advance notice distribution group address table, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable performance corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the performance corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the production and notice such as the main reach content are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol by referring to the determined special figure variation display game variation pattern (ready effect, etc.), the content of the notice, and the game state is performed (step C392).

Next, display setting of variable effect is performed (step C393), and display setting of notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it is possible to execute the effect and notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, setting is made to reduce the decoration starting memory display corresponding to the reduction of the corresponding starting memory when starting the special figure variation display game.

Then, set the sound number, which is the BGM number, the decoration number, which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (variation display of identification information) Display settings are made (step C397). Furthermore, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variable display game separately from the variable display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variable corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , ends the variable effect setting process.

<small hit>
As described above, the second special game state (special game state based on the small win) may have a plurality of types of opening modes (opening time and number of times of opening). Determines whether to set (adopt) the open mode. That is, there may be a plurality of types of small hits instead of one type.
FIG. 55(a) shows an example of the distribution probability of the types of small hits when winning a small win when there are three types of small wins: the first small win, the second small win, and the third small win. . Also, FIGS. 55(b) to (d) show an example of an opening mode for each small hit type.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the special game state based on the first small win, first, the small win fanfare time is started, and when the small win fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, The second special variable prize winning device 39 is closed when either the condition that the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is established. After that, the small winning remaining ball processing time starts, and when the small winning remaining ball processing time ends, the small winning ending time starts, and when the small winning ending time ends, the second special game state ends. That is, in the special game state based on the first small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 1, and the opening time (openable time) is set to 1600 milliseconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55(c), in the special game state based on the second small win, the number of times of opening is set to 2 times, and the opening time of each opening (openable time) is set to 1600 milliseconds. ing.
Further, as shown in FIG. 55(d), in the special game state based on the third small hit, the number of times of opening is set to 3 times, and the opening time of each opening (openable time) is set to 1600 milliseconds. ing.
As shown in FIG. 55(a), the first small hit that generates the second special game state with the number of opening times of one, the second small hit that generates the second special game state with the number of opening times of two, A distribution probability higher than that of the third small win that generates the second special game state with the number of times of opening being three is set. That is, it is rare that the result of the special figure variation display game is the second or third small hit.

The effect control device 300 sets the stop pattern on the display device 41 based on the decoration special symbol command from the game control device 100 in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54).
Specifically, when the information about the stop design included in the decoration special symbol command is the information about the stop design corresponding to the first small hit, the first small hit design is set as the stop design. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56(a), for example, the first small winning symbol ("123") is stopped and displayed as a result of the decoration special symbol variation display game. In this embodiment, "123 (symbol combination arranged in order of "1""2""3" from the left)" is the first small winning design, but the first small winning design is limited to "123" can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the information regarding the stop design included in the decoration special symbol command is the information regarding the stop design corresponding to the second small hit, the second small hit design is set as the stop design. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56(b), for example, the second small winning symbol ("234") is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special symbol variation display game. In the present embodiment, "234 (symbol combination arranged in order of '2', '3', and '4' from the left)" is the second small-hit design, but the second small-hit design is limited to '234'. can be changed as appropriate.
Further, when the information regarding the stop design included in the decoration special symbol command is the information regarding the stop design corresponding to the third small hit, the third small hit design is set as the stop design. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 56(c), for example, the third small winning symbol ("345") is stopped and displayed as a result of the decorative special symbol variation display game. In this embodiment, "345 (symbol combination arranged in the order of "3", "4", "5" from the left)" is the third small winning design, but the third small winning design is limited to "345". can be changed as appropriate.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56(a) to 56(c), during execution of the special figure variation display game, in the central part of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is displayed. A decoration special figure game display section 42a for displaying is provided. In the decoration special figure game display section 42a, the decoration identification information (large pattern) is variably displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas, and then stopped, thereby performing a decoration special figure variation display game (first decoration game). display.
In addition, at the corner of the display area of the display device 41 (for example, the lower right), decoration identification information (small pattern) that is relatively smaller than the decoration identification information (large pattern) variably displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. A small symbol variation display portion 42b for variably displaying the symbol) is provided. In the small pattern variation display section 42b, the decoration identification information (small pattern) is variably displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas, and then stopped, thereby playing a decoration special figure variation display game (second decoration game). indicate.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation is not displayed, but it may be displayed.

In addition, in the corner of the display area of the display device 41 (for example, the lower left), a standby pending display section 42c that displays the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation among the undigested start memories. be provided. The decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby pending display portion 42c corresponds to the starting memory of the main variation one-to-one, and is displayed side by side in the order of memory. Of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby pending display unit 42c, the decoration special figure start memory display at the right end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation that is stored first. , is designed to move to the right each time it is digested.
The effect control device 300 can execute a prefetch effect in the standby pending display section 42c. Specifically, the degree of expectation that the result of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit (or the corresponding special figure fluctuation display It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation pattern of the game will become a specific variation pattern.
In the drawing, the standby pending display portion 42c is surrounded by a dashed line for convenience, but the actual standby pending display portion 42c may or may not be surrounded by a line or the like.

In addition, in the corner (for example, lower part) of the display area of the display device 41, on the right side of the standby holding display part 42c, information about the starting memory corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game currently being executed is displayed. An execution suspension display portion 42d is provided. At the start of the main variation, the decoration special figure start memory display at the right end of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby reservation display part 42c moves to this execution reservation display unit 42d. It's becoming
The effect control device 300 can execute the advance notice effect in the in-execution suspension display section 42d. Specifically, depending on the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the running suspension display unit 42d, the expectation that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being run will be a big hit (or the special figure being run It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation pattern of the variation display game will become a specific variation pattern.
In the drawing, the execution suspension display portion 42d is surrounded by a dashed line for convenience, but the actual execution suspension display portion 42d may or may not be surrounded by a line or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first small winning symbol displayed in the decorative special symbol game display section 42a and the first small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b are the same symbols. The first small winning symbol displayed in the figure game display portion 42a and the first small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b may be different symbols.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second small winning symbol displayed in the decorative special symbol game display section 42a and the second small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b are the same symbols. The second small winning symbol displayed in the figure game display portion 42a and the second small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b may be different symbols.
Further, in the present embodiment, the third small winning symbol displayed in the decoration special symbol game display section 42a and the third small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b are the same symbols. The third small winning symbol displayed in the figure game display portion 42a and the third small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b may be different symbols.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b, the second small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b, and the small symbol variation display portion 42b are displayed. However, the first small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b, the second small winning symbol displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b, and the small symbol At least two of the third small winning symbols displayed on the variation display portion 42b may be the same symbols.

<Small hit pattern replacement effect>
When there are a plurality of types of small hits, the effect control device 300 can execute a small win symbol replacement effect for replacing the small win symbols. In the present embodiment, as the small winning symbol replacement effect, when the special figure variation display game with the first small winning is continuously executed, the first small winning symbol is changed to the second small winning symbol or the third small winning symbol. Execute the effect of replacing with the pattern.

First, an example of the display on the display device 41 when the small winning symbol replacement effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIG.
When the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode) starts, for example, as shown in FIG. A cumulative number of prize balls display section 42e is provided to indicate the number of prize balls obtained from the start. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIGS. In the portion 42b, after the ornament identification information is variably displayed in a high-speed variability mode (variably displayed at a speed that is difficult to identify), the first small winning symbol ("123") is stopped and displayed.

Then, a special game state based on the first small hit (second special game state with one opening) is generated. When the second special game state occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the corner (for example, upper left) of the display area of the display device 41 shows the number of prize balls acquired in the second special game state. A prize number display portion 42f is provided. In this embodiment, since the big winning hole is 15 prize balls, for example, as shown in FIGS. The value is updated to +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(e), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number of prize balls display portion 42f shifts to the number of prize balls display portion 42e to display the total number of prize balls. It is added to the value of part 42e.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small hit, for example, as shown in FIG. The first small winning symbol ("123") is stopped and displayed.

Next, a special game state based on the first small win (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and as shown in FIG. The value of the number-of-balls display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(i), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number of awarded balls display section 42f is added to the value of the accumulated number of awarded balls display section 42e.

Next, an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small-hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the first small-hit symbol with the second small-hit symbol will be described with reference to FIG.
When the execution of the small winning symbol replacement effect is set (a second small winning symbol replacement flag (described later) is set) and the first special figure fluctuation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. In the special figure game display section 42a and the small pattern variation display section 42b, the variable display of the decoration identification information in the high-speed variable mode is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the second small winning symbol ("234") is stop-displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. That is, in the small winning symbol replacement performance of the present embodiment, only the small winning symbols displayed in the decorative special symbol game display section 42a are replaced, and the small winning symbols displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b are not replaced. It's like

Then, a special game state based on the first small win (second special game state with one opening) occurs, and as shown in FIGS. Every time a player wins, the value of the number-of-balls display section 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(e), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number of awarded balls display section 42f is added to the value of the accumulated number of awarded balls display section 42e.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. be. On the other hand, the temporary stop display (variation display in the temporary stop mode) of the second small winning pattern is started in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. That is, in the small winning symbol replacement effect of the present embodiment, not only the small winning symbols displayed on the decorative special figure game display unit 42a, but also the variable display game (first Decoration game) is also replaced. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the second small winning symbol ("234") is stop-displayed in the decorative special figure game display section 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small win (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and as shown in FIG. The value of the number-of-balls display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(i), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number of awarded balls display section 42f is added to the value of the accumulated number of awarded balls display section 42e.

Next, an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small-hit symbol replacement effect of replacing the first small-hit symbol with the third small-hit symbol will be described with reference to FIG.
When the execution of the small winning symbol replacement effect is set (the third small winning symbol replacement flag (described later) is set) and the first special figure fluctuation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. In the special figure game display section 42a and the small pattern variation display section 42b, the variable display of the decoration identification information in the high-speed variable mode is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the third small winning symbol ("345") is stop-displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of opening times is 1) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. The value of the number-of-balls display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(d), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number of prize balls display section 42f is added to the value of the total number of prize number display section 42e.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. be. On the other hand, the temporary stop display (variation display in the temporary stop mode) of the third small winning pattern is started in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the third small winning symbol ("345") is stop-displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (a second special game state in which the number of times of opening is one) occurs, and as shown in FIG. The value of the number-of-balls display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(h), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number of awarded balls display section 42f is added to the value of the accumulated number of awarded balls display section 42e.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game is started, for example, as shown in FIG. be. On the other hand, the temporary stop display (variation display in the temporary stop mode) of the third small winning pattern is started in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. Stop is displayed. On the other hand, the third small winning symbol ("345") is stop-displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small win (a second special game state in which the number of openings is one) occurs, and the value of the number of prize balls display portion 42f is updated by +15 each time a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening. be done. Then, during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the prize ball number display section 42f is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number display section 42e.
57 to 59, the standby pending display portion 42c and the executing pending display portion 42d are displayed. good.

In order to execute the small-hit symbol replacement effect, the effect control device 300 performs the small-hit symbol replacement effect determination process, for example, at the end of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) (that is, after step C398).
FIG. 60(a) shows an example of the small hit symbol replacement effect determination process. In this small-hit symbol replacement performance determination process, first, it is determined whether the second small-hit design replacement flag or the third small-hit design replacement flag is set (step C401), and the second small-hit design replacement is performed. When both the flag and the third small winning design replacement flag are not set (step C401; N), it is determined whether the stop design set in the stop design setting process (step C392) is the first small winning design. Determine (step C402).

If the stop design set in the stop design setting process is not the first small winning design (step C402; N), that is, the stop design set in the stop design setting process is a winning design, a big winning design, a second small winning design, or a third design. If it is a small winning symbol, the small winning symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the first small winning symbol (step C402; Y), that is, if the result of the current special figure variation display game is the first small winning, A random number lottery for determining whether or not to execute a symbol replacement performance, specifically, a small winning symbol replacement performance is carried out (step C403).

When the lottery for the small-hit symbol replacement performance is lost (step C404; N), the small-hit symbol replacement performance determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the lottery for the small winning symbol replacement effect is won (step C404; Y), based on the look-ahead stop symbol command from the game control device 100, the result of the next special figure fluctuation display game is the first small. It is determined whether it is a hit (step C405).

If the result of the next special figure variation display game is not the first small hit (step C405; N), that is, the result of the next special figure variation display game is a loss, a big win, a second small win, or a third small win. If there is, or if the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the next special figure variation display game is not received, the small winning symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the result of the next special figure variation display game is the first small hit (step C405; Y), based on the look-ahead stop symbol command from the game control device 100, the next special figure variation display game is performed. It is determined whether the result is the first small hit (step C406).

If the result of the next special figure variation display game is not the first small hit (step C406; N), that is, the result of the next next special figure variation display game is a loss, a big win, a second small win, or a third small win. If there is, or if the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the next special symbol variation display game is not received, the stop symbol (first small winning symbol) set in the stop symbol setting process (step C392) is set to the first. Replace with 2 small-hit designs (step C407), set the second small-hit design replacement flag (step C408), set the number of consecutive times to "1" (step C409), and judge the small-hit design replacement performance. End the process.
In step C407, only the stop symbol information displayed on the decorative special symbol game display section 42a is rewritten, and the stop symbol information displayed on the small symbol variation display section 42b is not rewritten. As a result, when the fluctuation of this special figure fluctuation display game (that is, the first special figure fluctuation display game where the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the second small hit symbol replacement flag is set)) is stopped, The first small winning symbol is stop-displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b, and the second small winning design is stop-displayed in the decoration special-figure game display section 42a (see FIG. 58(b)).

On the other hand, when the result of the next special figure variation display game is the first small hit (step C406; Y), the stop design (first small hit design) set in the stop design setting process (step C392) is set to the first. Replace with 3 small winning designs (step C410), set the 3rd small winning design replacement flag (step C411), set the number of consecutive times to "2" (step C412), and judge the small winning design replacement performance. End the process.
In step C410, only the stop symbol information displayed on the decoration special symbol game display section 42a is rewritten, and the stop symbol information displayed on the small symbol variation display section 42b is not rewritten. As a result, when the fluctuation of this special figure fluctuation display game (that is, the execution of the small hit symbol replacement effect is set (the third small hit symbol replacement flag is set) and the first special figure variation display game) is stopped, The first small winning symbol is stop-displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b, and the third small winning design is stop-displayed in the decoration special-figure game display section 42a (see FIG. 59(b)).

Also, if the second small-hit design replacement flag or the third small-hit design replacement flag is set (step C401; Y), that is, the small-hit design replacement performance determination process is the next special figure fluctuation When it is executed in the fluctuation production setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the display game or at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure set in step C397 of the fluctuation production setting process The variation is replaced with the stop symbol set in step C392 of the variation effect setting process (step C413).

Specifically, when the second small-hit symbol replacement flag is set, the decoration special-figure variation set in step C397 (variation display in the high-speed variation mode of the decoration identification information) is changed to the second small-hit symbol. In addition, the stop pattern (first small winning pattern) set in step C392 is replaced with a second small winning pattern. In step C413, only the information of the decoration special figure fluctuation and the stop pattern displayed in the decoration special figure game display portion 42a is rewritten, and the information of the decoration special figure fluctuation and the stop pattern displayed in the small pattern fluctuation display portion 42b is rewritten. It's not supposed to. As a result, during the fluctuation of the next special figure variation display game, the small symbol variation display section 42b displays the decoration identification information with high speed variation, and the decoration special figure game display section 42a temporarily stops and displays the second small winning symbol. (See FIG. 58(f)), and when the next special figure variation display game is stopped, the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b, and the decorative special figure game display section 42a. , the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 58(g)).

In addition, when the third small-hit pattern replacement flag is set, the decoration special figure fluctuation set in step C397 (variation display in the high-speed fluctuation mode of the decoration identification information) is temporarily stopped in the third small-hit design. While replacing with the variable display in the mode, the stop design (first small winning design) set in step C392 is replaced with the third small winning design. In step C413, only the information of the decoration special figure fluctuation and the stop pattern displayed in the decoration special figure game display portion 42a is rewritten, and the information of the decoration special figure fluctuation and the stop pattern displayed in the small pattern fluctuation display portion 42b is rewritten. It's not supposed to. As a result, during the fluctuations of the next special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game, the small symbol variation display section 42b displays the ornament identification information in a high-speed variation, and the decoration special figure game display section 42a displays the second ornament identification information. The 3 small winning symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 59(e) and (i)), and when the next special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game are stopped, the small symbol variation display section 42b. , the first small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the decoration special symbol game display section 42a (see FIGS. 59(f) and (j)).

Next, the number of consecutive times is updated by -1 (step C414), and it is determined whether the number of consecutive times is 0 (step C415).
If the number of consecutive times is not 0 (step C415; N), that is, if the third small-hit symbol replacement flag is set, the small-hit symbol replacement effect determination process is the next special figure fluctuation display game. When it is executed in the fluctuation production setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of , the small hit symbol replacement production determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the number of consecutive times is 0 (step C415; Y), that is, when the second small-hit design replacement flag is set, the small-hit design replacement production determination process is the next special figure. When executed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the variable display game, or when the third small winning symbol replacement flag is set, and the small winning symbol replacement When the effect determination process is executed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54) executed at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the set small winning symbol replacement flag is cleared (step C416), the small winning symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.

Thus, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61(a), for example, when the special figure variation display game as the first small hit is executed twice in succession, a total of two big winning openings are displayed. In order to open the game twice, a small winning symbol replacement performance is executed to replace the second small winning symbol showing that the number of times of opening is two. In this small-hit symbol replacement performance, control is performed to display the second small-hit symbol once instead of displaying the first small-hit symbol twice (displaying twice with high-speed fluctuation display interposed).
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 61(b), when the special figure variation display game as the first small win is executed three times in succession, the number of openings is A small winning symbol replacement performance is executed for replacing with a third small winning symbol indicating that the number of times is three. In this small-hit symbol replacement performance, instead of the control of displaying the first small-hit symbol three times (three times with a high-speed fluctuation display interposed), the control of displaying the third small-hit symbol once is performed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 61(a), the result of the third game (one after another special figure variation display game) is lost, but the result of the third game is other than the first small hit ( (including the case where the result of the first game is undetermined, that is, the case where the starting memory corresponding to the third game is not stored).
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 61(b), the result of the fourth game is lost, but the result of the fourth game is other than the first small win (when the result of the fourth game is undecided , that is, the case where the starting memory corresponding to the fourth game is not stored).

FIG. 60(b) shows an example of the winning probability of the lottery for the small winning symbol replacement effect. In this embodiment, since the winning probability differs according to the current probability setting value, the current probability setting value can be suggested by the small winning design. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the greater the current set probability value, the higher the winning probability. That is, the higher the current probability set value is, the higher the probability of being replaced with the second small-hit symbol or the third small-hit symbol.

The big win probability can be changed by changing the probability set value, but the small win probability cannot be changed even if the probability set value is changed. Therefore, in the case of a game machine incapable of executing the small winning symbol replacement performance, the current probability set value cannot be suggested by the frequency of appearance of the first small winning symbol, the second small winning symbol and the third small winning symbol. On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the small winning symbol replacement effect, and the higher the current probability set value is, the higher the probability of being replaced with the second small winning symbol or the third small winning symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suggest a setting that is easy for the player to understand, that the more the second small winning symbols and the third small winning symbols appear, the higher the setting can be expected.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the special figure variation display game for the second small win and the special figure variation display game for the third small win are hardly executed. Therefore, since the difference in frequency of appearance of the second small winning pattern and the third small winning pattern becomes clear between when the current probability setting value is large and when it is small, it is possible to make setting suggestions in a more comprehensible manner. ing.

For example, it is possible to suggest settings by giving variations to the types of small winning symbols and the display method of the small winning symbols. For example, when two types of first small winning patterns are provided, namely, a first small winning pattern A which is more likely to be selected as the probability set value is larger, and a first small winning pattern B which is more likely to be selected as the probability set value is smaller, are provided. Even if the hit symbol replacement effect is not executable, it is possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value. Further, for example, the display method of the small winning pattern is provided with a first method of stopping after rolling and a second method of stopping after pitching, and the first method is selected as the probability setting value is larger. When the second method is more likely to be selected as the probability set value is smaller, it is possible to suggest the currently set probability set value even if the small winning symbol replacement performance is not executable. However, in these cases, there is a risk that the amount of information increases when small wins continue, and the player may be confused.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the small-hit pattern replacement effect can be executed, setting suggestions are made only by the number of times of display of the small-hit pattern (the number of times of stop display) using the minimum required small-hit pattern. Since this can be done, the player will not be confused even if minor wins occur continuously with rapid fluctuation.

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the larger the probability setting value is, the higher the probability of winning the lottery of the small-hit symbol replacement effect is. It is also possible to configure so that the probability of winning the lottery for symbol replacement performance is low.
Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60(b), for example, the same winning probability is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2", but different probability is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2". Winning probabilities may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of stages of the winning probability is not limited as long as it can be switched in multiple stages.

Here, the temporary stop mode is, for example, a mode in which the ornament identification information is oscillatingly displayed at a fixed position. The direction of swinging in the temporary stop mode may be the same direction as that of the adjacent decoration identification information, for example, as shown in FIG. Although it may be in the opposite direction to the identification information, it is preferable that the swinging direction in the temporary stop mode is in the opposite direction to the adjacent decoration identification information from the viewpoint of facilitating an accurate grasp of the game situation.
In this embodiment, the display area of the display device 41 is provided with not only the decoration special game display section 42a but also the small pattern variation display section 42b, and even if the lottery for the small winning symbol replacement effect is won, the small symbol variation is provided. The stop pattern and the decoration special figure variation displayed on the display section 42b are not replaced. Therefore, the player can easily grasp an accurate game situation by the decoration special figure variation display game (second decoration game) in the small symbol variation display section 42b. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(f), FIG. 59(e), and FIG. 59(i), decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a during the variation of the special figure variation display game. However, since the decoration identification information is displayed in the small symbol variation display portion 42b at high speed, if you look at the small symbol variation display portion 42b, you can see that the variation is not stopped (the special symbol variation display game is being executed). inside). However, from the viewpoint of making it easier to recognize that it is fluctuating, the direction of swinging in the temporary stop mode is preferably opposite to the adjacent ornament identification information, as shown in FIG. 61(d), for example. .

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the variation winning device (first A gaming machine that can generate a special game state (first special game state, second special game state) that opens the special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39), and the game is executed Prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining the game, and display control means (production control device 300) for displaying a pattern combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on the display device 41, The combination mode includes a first symbol combination mode (first minor win symbol) corresponding to the first special result (first minor win) of the special results, and a second special result (second minor win) of the special results. There is a second symbol combination mode (second small winning symbol) corresponding to the win), and when the result of the game is the first special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is the first number (one time). ) occurs (second special game state), and the result of the game is the second special result, the number of openings of the variable winning device is N times (twice) the first number of times. When a special game state (second special game state) with a certain second number of times (twice) occurs, and the display control means continues N times the game with the first special result based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. When it is determined, it is possible to execute a replacement performance (small hit symbol replacement performance) for replacing the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41, and in the replacement performance, the first symbol combination mode is displayed N times. Instead, it is configured to perform control to display the second symbol combination mode once (see FIG. 60(a)).

That is, the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before replacement (the total number of times of opening indicated by the display of the first symbol combination mode a plurality of times) and the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode after replacement (one second symbol combination It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) that performs display control such that the number of times of opening indicated by the display of the mode is the same. Therefore, without changing the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after replacement, the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes can be combined into one display of the symbol combination mode, so that the symbol combination mode (small winning pattern) can be displayed. can increase the interest of
In particular, in the first specific game state ST2 (small win RUSH mode), small wins occur with high frequency. Easy-to-understand and concise display can be performed.

Note that the first number of times is not limited to one, and may be, for example, a plurality of times.
Further, the N-fold is not limited to 2-fold, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a multiple-fold. That is, the second number of times is not limited to two times, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a plurality of times.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a setting means (game A control device 100) is provided, and a display control means (performance control device 300) executes a replacement performance (a small winning symbol replacement performance) with a different selection rate according to a probability setting value set by a setting means. (See FIG. 60(b)).
By configuring in this way, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the frequency of appearance of the first symbol combination mode and the second symbol combination mode, so the interest of the symbol combination mode (small winning pattern) can increase

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination mode further includes a third symbol combination mode (third small win pattern) corresponding to the third special result (third small win) of the special results. Yes, if the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the third special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is M times (three times) the first number of times (three times) A special game state (second special game state) occurs, and the display control means (production control device 300) determines that the game with the first special result continues M times based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. In this case, it is possible to execute a replacement performance (a small winning symbol replacement performance), and in the replacement performance, instead of the control of displaying the first symbol combination mode M times, the third symbol combination mode is displayed once. It can be configured to perform control (see FIG. 60(a)).

By configuring in this way, not only when the game with the first special result continues N times, but also when the game with the first special result continues M times, the opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement is performed. Since a plurality of symbol combination mode displays can be combined into one symbol combination mode display without changing the number of times, the interest of the symbol combination mode (small winning pattern) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that M times is not limited to 3 times, and can be changed appropriately as long as it differs from N times and is multiple times. That is, the third number of times is not limited to three times, and can be changed appropriately as long as it is different from the second number of times and is a plurality of times.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the small hit symbol replacement effect is executed in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), but of course, game states other than the first specific game state ST2 Even in , it is possible to execute a small hit symbol replacement effect.
Also, the distribution probability of the types of small wins when a small win is won is not limited to the distribution probability shown in FIG.
Also, in the present embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 and not in the special figure 1, but it is not limited to this. Also good.

Further, the types of small hits are not limited to three types, and may be changed appropriately as long as there are a plurality of types. For example, two types may be used.
Specifically, the types of small hits may be two types, a first small win and a second small win. , steps C406 and C410 to C412 of FIG. 60(a) are omitted. Also, the types of small wins may be two types, the first small win and the third small win. In that case (that is, when N=3 and there is no third special result), the Steps C407-C409 of 60(a) are omitted.

Also, the number of types of small hits may be four or more. Specifically, for example, when the special figure variation display game with the first small win continues twice, for example, as shown in FIG. Executes a small winning pattern replacement performance for replacing with a second small winning pattern indicating that there is a certain one (performs control to display the second small winning pattern once instead of the control to display the first small winning pattern twice), When the special figure variation display game as the first small hit continues three times, for example, as shown in FIG. Execute a small-hit pattern replacement effect to replace the winning pattern (control to display the third small-hit pattern once instead of the control to display the first small-hit pattern three times), and the first small-hit pattern When the figure fluctuation display game continues four times, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the first small winning symbol is replaced with a fourth small winning symbol indicating that the number of opening times is four. Execute the replacement performance (control to display the fourth small winning pattern once instead of the control to display the first small winning pattern four times), and the special figure fluctuation display game as the first small winning is five times. In the case of continuous, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), a small winning pattern replacement performance is executed to replace the first small winning pattern with a fifth small winning pattern indicating that the number of times of opening is 5 ( Instead of the control of displaying the first small-hit symbol five times, the control of displaying the fifth small-hit symbol once may be performed.
In the example shown in FIG. 62(a), the result of the fifth game is lost, but the result of the fifth game is other than the first small win (when the result of the fifth game is undecided). , that is, the case where the starting memory corresponding to the fifth game is not stored).

<Modified example 1 of small hit pattern replacement effect>
Although the small-win symbol replacement effect can be executed when the special-figure variation display game that becomes the first small-win continues, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, if the number of openings indicated by the small winning pattern before replacement and the number of openings indicated by the small winning pattern after replacement are the same, the results of consecutive special figure fluctuation display games are different types of small winnings. In addition, it may be possible to execute a small winning symbol replacement effect.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. Executes a small-hit pattern replacement performance in which the winning pattern and the second small-hit pattern are replaced with the third small-hit pattern (control to display the first small-hit pattern once and control to display the second small-hit pattern once. Instead, control may be performed to display the third small hit symbol once).
In the example shown in FIG. 62(c), the result of the first game (this special figure variation display game) is the first small hit, and the second game (next special figure variation display game). result is the second small hit, but it may be the other way around. That is, when the result of the first game (current special figure variation display game) is the second minor hit and the second game (the result of the next special figure variation display game) is the first minor hit, It is also possible to execute a small-hit symbol replacement performance in which the second small-hit symbol and the first small-hit symbol are replaced with the third small-hit symbol.

<Modified example 2 of small hit pattern replacement effect>
Further, if the number of openings indicated by the small winning pattern before replacement and the number of openings indicated by the small winning pattern after replacement are the same number, when the special figure fluctuation display games that are small winnings are not consecutive, the small winning is possible. It is also possible to make it possible to execute the symbol replacement effect.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d), when there is a special figure variation display game to be lost between special figure variation display games to be a small hit, the small winning pattern difference Alternate performance may be executed. In that case, when the variation of the special figure variation display game to be lost is stopped, if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the decorative special figure game display section 42a, the game result may be misunderstood. Thus, during the execution of the small winning symbol replacement effect, it is preferable to display an image that hides the small winning symbol of the decoration special symbol game display section 42a when the variation of the special symbol variation display game to be lost is stopped.

FIG. 64 is an example of the display on the display device 41 when executing the small winning symbol replacement effect shown in FIG. 63(a).
When the execution of the small winning symbol replacement effect is set (the second small winning symbol replacement flag is set) and the first special figure fluctuation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the decoration special figure game In the display section 42a and the small pattern variation display section 42b, the decoration identification information starts to be displayed in a high-speed variation mode. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. While it is stopped and displayed, the second small winning symbol ("234") is stopped and displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a.

Next, a special game state based on the first small hit (second special game state with one opening) occurs, and as shown in FIG. The value of the number-of-balls display portion 42f is updated by +15. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(d), during the ending time of the second special game state, the value of the number-of-prize-balls display portion 42f is added to the value of the number-of-price-balls display portion 42e.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. At 42a, temporary stop display of the second small winning symbol is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a loss, for example, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the second small winning symbol ("234") is stopped and displayed in the decorative special symbol game display section 42a, and a cut-in image G1 is displayed in front of the second small winning symbol.

Then, when the next special figure variation display game is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(g), the cut-in image G1 disappears, and the high-speed variation display of the decoration identification information is started in the small symbol variation display section 42b. On the other hand, the temporary stop display of the second small winning symbol is started in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the first small win, for example, as shown in FIG. While it is stopped and displayed, the second small winning symbol ("234") is stopped and displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a.
Of course, the image that hides the small winning pattern is not limited to the cut-in image G1 and can be changed as appropriate. In addition, instead of displaying an image that hides the small winning symbols, even during execution of the small winning symbol replacement effect, when the variation of the special figure fluctuation display game that results in a loss is stopped, the decoration special figure game display unit 42a is displayed. It is also possible to stop and display the lost symbols.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small winning symbol replacement effects of the above-described embodiment, modification 1, and modification 2 executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, A special game state (first special game state, second special game state) that opens the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) when the result of the game is a special result ), and has a prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining the game before the game is executed, and a display device 41 for displaying a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game. and a display control means (production control device 300) for displaying on the symbol combination mode, and the symbol combination mode includes a plurality of types of symbol combination modes (for example, the first small winning symbol , second small winning symbol, third small winning symbol), and the display control means determines that the special game state (second special game state) occurs multiple times based on the determination result of the prior determination means, A replacement effect (small winning symbol replacement effect) for replacing the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41 can be executed, and in the replacement effect, the symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game is executed each time the game is executed. instead of displaying a symbol combination mode indicating the total number of times the variable winning device has been opened in a plurality of special game states over a plurality of games.
Therefore, without changing the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after replacement, the display of a plurality of symbol combination modes can be combined into one display of the symbol combination mode, so that the symbol combination mode (small winning pattern) can be displayed. can increase the interest of

<Modified example 3 of small hit pattern replacement effect>
In the above-described embodiment, modified example 1, and modified example 2, the small winning symbol replacement effect indicates that the number of times of opening is greater than the predetermined number of times. Although it is an effect to replace with a small hit pattern, it may be vice versa. That is, if the number of times of opening indicated by the small winning pattern before replacement and the number of times of opening indicated by the small winning pattern after replacement are the same, the number of times of opening is a predetermined number of times as a small winning pattern replacement effect. It is also possible to execute an effect of replacing the indicated small winning symbol with a small winning symbol indicating that the number of opening times is less than the predetermined number of times.

Specifically, for example, instead of (or in addition to) the small winning symbol replacement performance determination processing shown in FIG. 60(a), the small winning symbol replacement performance determination processing shown in FIG. good.
In the small-hit symbol replacement performance determination process shown in FIG. 65(a), first, a lottery for the small-hit symbol replacement performance is performed (step C421), and when the lottery for the small-hit symbol replacement performance is lost (step C422; In N), the small winning symbol replacement effect determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the lottery for the small winning design replacement effect is won (step C422; Y), it is determined whether the stopping design set in the stopping design setting process (step C392) is the second small winning design (step C423).

When the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the second small winning symbol (step C423; Y), that is, when the result of the current special figure variation display game is the second small winning, stop symbol setting process. (step C424), and the small winning symbol replacement performance determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the stop design set in the stop design setting process is not the second small winning design (step C423; N), is the stop design set in the stop design setting process (step C392) the third small winning design? is determined (step C425).

If the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is not the third small winning symbol (step C425; N), the small winning symbol replacement performance determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol set in the stop symbol setting process is the third small winning symbol (step C435; Y), that is, when the result of the current special figure variation display game is the third small winning, the stopping symbol is The stop design (third small winning design) set in the setting process is replaced with the first small winning design (step C426), and the small winning design replacement performance determination process is terminated.

FIGS. 65(b) to 65(g) show an example of the display on the display device 41 in the case of executing the small-hit symbol replacement effect in which the second small-hit symbol is replaced with the first small-hit symbol.
When the special figure variation display game that becomes the second small hit starts, for example, as shown in FIG. Variable display is started. Then, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the second small win, for example, as shown in FIG. While it is stopped and displayed, the first small winning symbol ("123") is stopped and displayed in the decoration special figure game display section 42a. That is, even in the small winning symbol replacement performance of this modification, only the small winning symbols displayed in the decoration special symbol game display section 42a are replaced, and the small winning symbols displayed in the small symbol variation display section 42b are not replaced. It's like

Then, a special game state based on the second small hit (second special game state with two opening times) occurs, and when the first openable time starts, for example, as shown in FIG. Each time a game ball wins a winning hole, the value of the winning ball number display section 42f is updated by +15. After that, during the interval time between the first release and the second release, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(f), the first small winning symbol ("123") is stop-displayed in the decoration special symbol game display section 42a. Then, when the second openable time starts, for example, as shown in FIG. During the ending time of the 2 special game state, the value of the number of prize balls display section 42f is added to the value of the total number of prize balls display section 42e.

That is, in the small winning symbol replacement effect in which the second small winning symbol is replaced with the first small winning symbol, when the variation of the special figure variation display game where the result is the second small winning is stopped, the small symbol variation display unit 42b displays the second small winning symbol. While the small winning symbol ("234") is statically displayed, the first small winning symbol ("123") is statically displayed in the decorative special symbol game display section 42a. Then, during the interval time between the first release and the second release in the special game state based on the second small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is two), the decoration special figure game display section 42a , the first small winning symbol ("123") is stop-displayed after the decoration identification information is displayed with high-speed fluctuation.
In addition, in the small winning symbol replacement performance in which the third small winning symbol is replaced with the first small winning symbol, when the special figure variation display game that results in the third small winning is stopped, the small symbol variation display unit 42b displays the third small winning symbol. While the small winning symbol ("345") is stop-displayed, the first small winning symbol ("123") is stopped-displayed in the decorative special figure game display section 42a. Then, in the special game state based on the third small hit (the second special game state in which the number of times of opening is three times), during the interval time between the first opening and the second opening, and the second opening and the third opening During the interval time between the opening and after the ornament identification information is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation manner in the ornament special figure game display section 42a, the first small winning symbol ("123") is stop-displayed.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small winning symbol replacement effect of the third modification executes the game (special figure fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the game is the special result. A gaming machine that can generate a special game state (first special game state, second special game state) that opens the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) when it becomes There is provided a display control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a symbol combination mode corresponding to the result of the game on the display device 41, and the symbol combination mode includes a first special result (first small A first symbol combination mode (first small win symbol) corresponding to a win), and a second symbol combination mode (second small win symbol) corresponding to a second special result (second small win) of the special results. , and if the result of the game is the first special result, a special game state (second special game state) occurs in which the variable winning device is opened the first number of times (once). If the result is the second special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is the second number (2 times) that is N times (2 times) the first number of times (2 times) Special game state (second special game state) occurs, and the display control means can execute a replacement effect (small winning symbol replacement effect) for replacing the symbol combination mode displayed on the display device 41 when the result of the game is the second special result. In the replacement effect, instead of the control of displaying the second symbol combination mode once, it is configured to perform the control of displaying the first symbol combination mode N times (see FIG. 65(a)). .

That is, the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode before replacement (the number of times of opening indicated by the display of the second symbol combination mode once) and the number of times of opening indicated by the symbol combination mode after replacement (of the first symbol combination mode for multiple times) It is possible to execute a replacement effect (small hit symbol replacement effect) that performs display control such that the total number of times of opening shown by display) is the same. Therefore, without changing the number of openings indicated by the symbol combination mode before and after the replacement, one symbol combination mode display can be divided into a plurality of symbol combination mode displays, so that the symbol combination mode (small winning pattern) can be displayed. can increase the interest of
Note that the first number of times is not limited to one, and may be, for example, a plurality of times.
Further, the N-fold is not limited to 2-fold, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a multiple-fold. That is, the second number of times is not limited to two times, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is a plurality of times.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small winning symbol replacement effect of the modification 3, the symbol combination mode further includes a third symbol corresponding to the third special result (third small winning) of the special results. If there is a combination mode (3rd small winning pattern) and the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the 3rd special result, the number of times the variable winning device is opened is M times (3 times) the first time ) occurs a special game state (second special game state) that is the third number of times (three times), and the display control means (production control device 300) makes a difference when the result of the game is the third special result. A replacement performance (small winning symbol replacement performance) can be executed, and in the replacement performance, instead of the control of displaying the third symbol combination mode once, the control of displaying the first symbol combination mode M times is performed. (See FIG. 65(a)).

By constructing in this manner, the number of openings indicated by the symbol combination mode is changed before and after replacement not only when the result of the game is the second special result, but also when the result of the game is the third special result. Since one symbol combination mode display can be divided into a plurality of symbol combination mode displays, the interest in the symbol combination mode (small winning pattern) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that M times is not limited to 3 times, and can be changed appropriately as long as it differs from N times and is multiple times. That is, the third number of times is not limited to three times, and can be changed appropriately as long as it is different from the second number of times and is a plurality of times.
In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 65(b) to (g), the small hit symbol replacement effect of the modification 3 is executed in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), but of course, the first It is possible to execute the small winning symbol replacement effect of the third modification even in a game state other than the specific game state ST2.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the small winning symbol replacement effect of the third modification, the display control means (effect control device 300) is set according to the probability setting value set by the setting means (game control device 100) It can be configured to select whether or not to execute the replacement performance (small hit symbol replacement performance) at different selection rates.
That is, the small-hit symbol replacement effect of the modification 3 is the same as the small-hit symbol replacement effect of the above-described embodiment, the modification 1, and the modification 2, and the winning probability of the lottery of the small-hit symbol replacement effect is It can be configured differently depending on the probability setting.
By configuring in this way, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the small winning pattern, so that the interest in the pattern combination mode (small winning pattern) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the small winning symbol replacement effect of the above embodiment, the small winning symbol replacement effect of the first modification, the small winning symbol replacement effect of the second modification, and the small winning symbol replacement effect of the third modification. can be applied in combination as appropriate.

<Board production device>
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the board rendering device 44. As shown in FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is provided with a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 includes a movable member 440 and a drive mechanism (not shown) that operates the movable member 440 .
The movable member 440 includes a circular rotating body 441, and a driving mechanism (not shown) moves a portion of the rotating body 441 to the display area of the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to move between an overlapping initial position and an operating position where the entire rotating body 441 overlaps the display area of the display device 41 . Further, the rotating body 441 of the movable member 440 is rotatable by a drive mechanism (not shown) as shown in FIG. 66(c), for example.
Some of the plurality of LEDs included in the board decoration device 46 are provided on the movable member 440 . That is, the movable member 440 is provided with a light-emitting member, and the movable member 440 is decorated (light-emitting decoration) by the light-emitting member.

In this embodiment, the initial position of the movable member 440 is the position where a part of the rotor 441 overlaps the upper end of the display area of the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 66(a). , and the initial position can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66B, for example, the position where the rotating body 441 entirely overlaps with the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 is the operating position of the movable member 440. There is no limitation, and the operating position can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 66(c), the rotor 441 of the movable member 440 rotates while the movable member 440 is at the operating position. The position of the movable member 440 during operation can be changed as appropriate. That is, the rotating body 441 may rotate while the movable member 440 is at a position other than the operating position (for example, the initial position or a midway position between the initial position and the operating position). In the example shown in FIG. 66(c), the rotating body 441 rotates clockwise, but this is not a limitation, and the rotating body 441 rotates clockwise instead of (or in addition to) rotating. ), and counterclockwise rotation may be performed.

<Character performance>
The effect control device 300 can execute a character effect that moves the movable member 440 . In this embodiment, when the character object effect lottery is won and the effect button 25 is operated during the operation valid period, the character object effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, as the performance of the role object, after performing the movement operation of the movable member 440 (the operation of moving from the initial position to the operation position), the rotation operation of the movable member 440 (the operation of rotating the rotating body 441) is performed. Execute the performance to be performed.

Effect control device 300, for example in step C386 or step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), to display an image (operation prompting image G2) prompting the player to operate the effect button 25 to execute the operation promotion effect. An operation promotion effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not, and when the operation promotion effect lottery is won (when it is decided to execute the operation promotion effect), the role of deciding whether to execute the role product effect A lottery for the performance will be held. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game, an operation promotion effect lottery and a character product effect lottery are executed for the special figure variation display game.

Then, when the operation promotion effect lottery is won, display setting corresponding to the operation promotion effect is performed in step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and step C396 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54). , the sound number corresponding to the operation promotion effect (the number indicating the type of effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of effect by the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18) Settings are made.
Further, when the character object effect lottery is won, at step C394 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), display setting corresponding to the character object effect is performed, and at step C396 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54). In the above, the sound number (number indicating the type of effect by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (number indicating the type of effect by the board effect device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18) corresponding to the role object effect Settings are made.

Special figure fluctuation display games that result in a big hit or special figure fluctuation display games that generate SP reach The probability of winning is higher than the lottery for special figure fluctuation display games and special figure fluctuation display games that do not generate SP reach, and the result is other than a big hit. The character production lottery for games is a character production lottery for other special figure fluctuation display games (special figure fluctuation display games where the result is a big hit and special figure fluctuation display games where SP reach occurs) It is set so that the probability of being defeated is higher than Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of expectation of SP reach is high by executing the performance of the character.
In addition, there are cases where the role production is not executed after the operation promotion production (when the operation promotion production lottery is won but the role production lottery is lost), but the operation promotion production is always executed before the role production. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that there is a possibility that the character object production will be executed by executing the operation promoting production. That is, by executing the operation prompting effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the role product effect may be executed.

The role object presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is an example of a timing chart, and FIG. 68 is an example of luminous decoration and display.
The special figure variation display game that wins the operation promotion effect lottery and the role object effect lottery starts, and when the operation valid period starts (t101), as shown in FIGS. outputs a control signal to the display device 41 to display the operation prompting image G2 on the display device 41 . For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, the operation prompting image G2 includes a button image G21 imitating the effect button 25, a notification image G22 (for example, a time bar image) for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period, and a effect. It is an image including a designation image G23 (for example, a character image such as "PUSH!" Further, as shown in FIGS. 67(a), (b) and 68(a), the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is in a normal light-emitting mode in which it lights up in white before the valid operation period starts. is emitting light.

When the production button 25 is operated during the operation valid period (t102), the production control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board production device 44, and causes the movable member 440 to move (moving from the initial position to the operating position). action). As a result, the motor that moves the movable member 440 rotates, and the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operating position. In this embodiment, since a stepping motor is used as the motor for moving the movable member 440, when the motor starts rotating, specifically, switching from a non-excited state (excitation OFF state) to an excited state (excitation ON state) is performed. At times, the movable member 440 slightly moves (the position does not change). That is, the movable member 440 executes a moving operation after executing a preparatory operation of slightly moving at a fixed position, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b).

Therefore, since the preparatory motion for the moving motion is always performed before the moving motion is performed, there are problems such as being an eyesore and the appearance of the performance of the character object being unattractive.
In addition, before the execution of the movement motion, it is always definitively notified that the movement motion will be executed by the preparatory motion. That is, before the start of the character production, it is definitely notified that the character production will be executed by the preparatory motion, so that the expectation that the character production may be executed is given at the start of the character production. There is also a problem that the attraction of the performance of the character is reduced because it cannot be sustained until the end.

In order to alleviate these problems, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41 while the provided light emitting member is turned off. By turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the player's line of sight can be attracted to the light-emitting portion and diverted from the movable member 440. The preparatory action of member 440 is less likely to be noticed. Furthermore, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, in addition to turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440, by displaying the blackout image G3 on the display device 41, the movable member 440 The color (the color when the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is in the off state) and the color of the background of the movable member 440 are similar (the same color), and the movable member 440 Since it fits in, the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes less noticeable.

Specifically, when the effect button 25 is operated (t102), the effect control device 300 causes the board effect device 44 to move the movable member 440 (moving from the initial position to the operating position). , outputs a control signal to turn off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 to the board decoration device 46, and outputs a control signal to the display device 41 to display the blackout image G3. Output. As a result, as shown in FIG. 68B, for example, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off, and the blackout image G3 is displayed on the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 68(b), the blackout image G3 is displayed on the entire display area of the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the preparatory motion of the movable member 440 is not conspicuous, for example, as shown in FIG. G3 may be displayed, or, for example, as shown in FIG. ), an image with a dark background may be displayed.

Then, when the time required for the preparation operation of the movable member 440 elapses (t103), the effect control device 300 sends the board decoration device 46 a control signal for causing the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode. , and outputs a control signal for displaying the effect image G4 to the display device 41 . As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(e), while the movable member 440 is moving, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 emits light in a red specific light-emitting mode, and the display An effect image G4 for emphasizing the movable member 440 is displayed on the device 41 .
Next, when the time required for the movement operation of the movable member 440 elapses (t105), that is, when the movable member 440 reaches the operating position, the effect control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board effect device 44, and the movable member 440 (rotating body 441 rotates).

After that, when it comes time to end the character production (t106), the production control device 300 outputs a control signal to the board production device 44 to end the rotation operation of the movable member 440, and the return operation of the movable member 440 ( movement from the operating position to the initial position). Further, a control signal is output to the board decoration device 46 to terminate the light emission in the specific light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, and a control signal is output to the display device 41 to display the effect image G4. End the display.
It should be noted that if the effect button 25 is not operated during the effective period of operation, it is not necessary to execute the effect (character effect) of moving and rotating, and after the end of the effective period of operation, the movement and You may perform the production|presentation (character object production|presentation) which rotates.

Here, in the present embodiment, the moving motion and the preparatory motion are motions executed with a fixed time value, and the rotation motion is a motion executed with a variable time value. is determined in advance. Therefore, the execution time of the rotation action differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. That is, the time required for the preparation action (t102 to t103) does not change according to the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated, and the time required for the movement action (t103 to t105) also depends on the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated. Further, the time from the start of the operation effective period to the end of the performance of the character object (t101 to t106) does not change according to the timing at which the performance button 25 is operated. is operated farther from the end of the operation valid period (t104), the execution time (t105 to t106) of the rotation operation becomes longer.

Specifically, for example, the time (t102a to t103a) required for the preparatory operation in FIG. 67(a) is the same as the time (t102b to t103b) required for the preparatory operation in FIG. ) is the same as the time (t103b to t105b) required for the movement operation in FIG. The time (t101 to t106) until the end of is the same as the time (t101 to t106) from the start of the valid operation period to the end of the performance of the character in FIG. 67(b). Since the operation timing (t102a) in FIG. 67(a) is farther from the end of the effective operation period (t104) than the operation timing (t102b) in FIG. The execution time (t105a to t106) is longer than the rotation operation execution time (t105b to t106) in FIG. 67(b).

In this embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the return operation, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to stop emitting light in a specific light emitting mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, light emission in the specific light emission mode is continued, and when the return operation of the movable member 440 is completed (when the movable member 440 reaches the initial position), It is also possible to configure so as to end light emission in a specific light emission mode.
Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image G4 is ended when the movable member 440 starts the return operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display of the effect image G4 is continued even while the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, and when the return operation of the movable member 440 is completed (when the movable member 440 reaches the initial position), the effect image G4 is displayed. It is also possible to configure to end the display of the image G4.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the white light emission mode is the normal light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal light emission mode can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in the normal light emitting mode before the operation effective period starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is the same before the valid operation period starts and after the valid operation period starts until the operation of the effect button 25 is detected. There may be one, or it may be different. For example, the light may be turned off before the valid operation period starts, and the light may be emitted after the valid operation period starts.

Further, in the present embodiment, the red light emission mode is the specific light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the specific light emission mode is not limited to this, and the specific light emission mode can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a specific light emitting mode while the moving operation and the rotating operation are being performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emission mode during the movement and rotation may be the normal light emission mode (that is, the same light emission mode as the light emission mode before turning off). Further, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be the same or different between the movement operation and the rotation operation.

Further, in this embodiment, a portion of the movable member 440 at the initial position overlaps the upper portion of the center case 40, as shown in FIG. 66(a), for example. Therefore, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 and displaying a blackout image G3 (or an image with a dark background) on the display device 41 are performed. In addition, the LED provided on the upper part of the center case 40 (that is, the light-emitting member provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position) may be turned off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 less conspicuous.

In the present embodiment, the initial position is a position where a portion of the movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41 . , or a position where the entire movable member 440 does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 .
Further, for example, when the movable member 440 at the initial position does not entirely overlap the display area of the display device 41, the blackout image G3 (or Instead of displaying an image with a dark background, the light-emitting members provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position may be turned off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 inconspicuous.

Further, in this embodiment, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, the display device 41 is configured to display the blackout image G3 (or an image with a dark background), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 69, the display of the operation prompting image G2 may be continued even while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory motion. With this configuration, the player's line of sight can be drawn to the operation prompting image G2 and diverted from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory motion of the movable member 440 is less likely to be noticed. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is turned off while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation. It is also possible to emit light in a light emission mode in which the background color of the operation prompting image G2 continuously displayed on the screen is the same color as the background color.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in relation to a game, and the movable member 440 performs a predetermined motion (moving motion). and can emit light. t105) and the second period (t102 to t103) immediately preceding the first period (see FIGS. 67A and 67B).

That is, the movable member 440 is configured to emit light differently between the first period during which the predetermined operation (moving operation) is performed and the second period during which the preparatory operation for performing the predetermined operation is performed. Therefore, as the light emission mode in the first period, a light emission mode (for example, a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode) that makes the operation (moving operation) of the movable member 440 conspicuous is selected, or the light emission mode in the second period is selected. As a result, it is possible to select a light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off) that makes the operation (preparatory operation) of the movable member 440 inconspicuous. can increase

Note that in the present embodiment, the light emission mode in which the light is turned off is the light emission mode in the second period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission mode in the second period may be, for example, a light emission mode in which light is emitted at a luminance equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold. By causing the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 to emit light with a luminance equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, maximum luminance), the movable member 440 shines brightly, making it possible to divert the player's line of sight from the movable member 440. , the preparatory motion of the movable member 440 becomes less likely to be noticed, and the attraction of the presentation using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the display device 41, the movable member 440 is operable in front of the display device 41 (see FIGS. 66A and 66B), and the display of the display device 41 is displayed. The aspect can be configured differently between the first period (t103 to t105) and the second period (t102 to t103) (see FIGS. 67(a) and (b)).

That is, the display mode of the display device 41 can be configured to differ between the first period in which the predetermined action (moving action) is performed and the second period in which the preparatory action for performing the predetermined action is performed. With this configuration, the display mode in the first period is a display mode that makes the motion (moving motion) of the movable member 440 conspicuous (for example, a display that displays an effect image G4 for emphasizing the movable member 440). mode), or select a display mode (for example, a display mode in which a blackout image G3 is displayed) in which the operation (preparatory operation) of the movable member 440 is not conspicuous as the display mode in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production using the movable member 440. FIG.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in relation to a game, and the movable member 440 is capable of executing a predetermined motion (moving motion). In addition, it can emit light, and the light emission mode of the movable member is a first period (t103 to t105) during which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation and a second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period. ), the color of the movable member 440 and the display color of the display device 41 in the second period can be configured to be of the same color (FIGS. 68B and 68C). , (d)).
By configuring in this way, the movable member 440 fits in with the surroundings, so that the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes less conspicuous, and the entertainment using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

As described above, the light emission mode in the second period is not limited to the light emission mode in which the light is turned off, and can be changed as appropriate. That is, the color of the movable member 440 in the second period can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the blackout image G3 (or an image with a dark background) is displayed on the display device 41 during the second period (the period during which the movable member 440 performs the preparatory operation). Not limited. That is, the display color of the display device 41 in the second period is not limited to black (or dark color), and can be changed as appropriate according to the color of the movable member 440 in the second period. For example, when the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is caused to emit white light with a luminance equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (for example, maximum luminance) during the second period, the display color of the display device 41 during the second period is white ( Alternatively, by using a bright color), the movable member 440 blends in with the surroundings, making the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 less conspicuous, and the performance using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in relation to a game, and the movable member 440 performs a predetermined motion (moving motion and rotating motion). and can emit light. t106) and the second period (from t106) immediately after the first period can be configured to be different.
Specifically, in this embodiment, when the movable member 440 starts the return operation (t106), the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to stop emitting light in the specific light emitting mode. .

Therefore, it is possible to configure the movable member 440 so that the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 differs between the first period during which the predetermined movement (moving movement and rotating movement) is performed and the second period during which the returning movement is performed. With this configuration, as the light emission mode in the first period, a light emission mode (for example, a specific light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode) that makes the motion (movement motion and rotation motion) of the movable member 440 conspicuous is selected. Alternatively, the light emission mode in the second period may be a light emission mode in which the operation (return operation) of the movable member 440 is not conspicuous (for example, a light emission mode different from the specific light emission mode (for example, a normal light emission mode or a light-off state). Since it is possible to select the light emission mode)) to be used, it is possible to enhance the interest of the presentation using the movable member 440. FIG.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in relation to a game, and the movable member 440 is capable of executing a predetermined motion (moving motion). In addition, light can be emitted, and the light emission mode of the movable member 440 (the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is the first period (t103 to t105) during which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined operation. , and the second period (t102 to t103) immediately before the first period, in that the color of the movable member 440 and the color of the light-emitting member provided around the movable member 440 are different in the second period. It can be configured to be the same color.
Specifically, in this embodiment, while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory operation, in addition to turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440, the LED provided on the top of the center case 40 is turned off. (that is, the light-emitting members provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position) can be turned off.
By configuring in this way, the movable member 440 fits in with the surroundings, so that the preparatory operation of the movable member 440 becomes less conspicuous, and the performance using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the movable member 440 in relation to a game, and includes operation means (the effect button 25) that can be operated by the player. , and a display device 41 that displays an operation prompting image G2 for prompting the operation of the operation means, and the movable member 440 is provided with a predetermined The operation (moving operation) is executed, and the display device 41 can be configured to continue displaying the operation prompting image G2 until the movable member 440 starts the predetermined operation even after the operation means is operated. (See Figure 69).

That is, the display of the operation prompting image G2 can be continued until the preparatory action for performing the predetermined action (moving action) is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's line of sight to the operation prompting image G2 and divert it away from the movable member 440. It is possible to increase the interest of the production that was used.
Note that the operation means is not limited to the effect button 25, and may be the touch panel 29, for example.

Also, the image displayed on the display device 41 to divert the player's line of sight from the movable member 440 is not limited to the operation prompting image G2 and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, instead of (or in addition to) displaying an image on the display device 41 for diverting the player's line of sight from the movable member 440 while the movable member 440 is performing the preparatory motion, the movable member 440 is prepared. Light-emitting members other than the light-emitting members provided around the movable member 440 at the initial position (for example, an LED arranged in a region far from the movable member 440 at the initial position) are caused to emit light during the operation period. can be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to attract the player's line of sight to the light emitting portion and divert it away from the movable member 440, so that the preparatory motion of the movable member 440 is hardly noticed, and an effect using the movable member 440 is achieved. can increase the interest of

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an action presentation using the movable member 440 in relation to a game, and the movable member 440 includes an action presentation (moving action and rotating action). The notice action (preparation action) is performed immediately before the performance of the performance), and the execution time of the notice action is constant, and the movement of the movable member 440 during the notice action is constant regardless of the performance mode of the action presentation. (see FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b)).
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the forewarning operation (preparatory operation) is a rattling operation (a slight movement at a fixed position) caused by the start of excitation of the stepping motor. The execution time (t102 to t103) of the notice action is constant regardless of the length of the notice action, and the movement of the movable member 440 during the notice action is constant.

Therefore, the presentation mode of the concealment effect (for example, the effect of turning off the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, the effect of displaying the blackout image G3 on the display device 41, etc.) for concealing the advance notice operation (preparation operation) is Since it is not necessary to change according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, the processing load when performing the presentation using the movable member 440 can be reduced.
That is, when the execution time of the notice action differs depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or when the movement of the movable member 440 at the time of the notice action differs depending on the effect mode of the action effect, the concealment effect is executed according to the effect mode of the action effect. Since it is necessary to execute the process of selecting the effect mode (effect time, effect range, etc.), the processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the advance notice action and the movement of the movable member 440 during the advance notice action are constant regardless of the effect mode of the action effect. no need to run.

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the notice action and the movement of the movable member 440 during the notice action are constant regardless of the presentation time of the action presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the presentation mode of the action presentation is not limited to the presentation time of the action presentation, and may be, for example, the type of action performed in the action presentation. Specifically, for example, when it is possible to execute a character effect that performs a moving motion and a rotating motion, and a character effect that performs a moving motion (no rotating motion) as the action effect, in the action effect Regardless of the type of action to be performed, the execution time of the notice action and the movement of the movable member 440 during the notice action are constant.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the presentation time (t103 to t106) of action presentation can be configured to be changeable (see FIGS. 67(a) and (b)).
By configuring in this way, regardless of the start timing of the action production (for example, the operation timing of the production button 25), it is possible to end the action production at the predetermined end timing, so the movable member 440 is used. It is possible to increase the interest of the production that was used.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the presentation time of the action presentation is changed in order to end the action presentation at the predetermined end timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure such that the longer the effect time of the action effect is, the higher the expectation for the big hit of the action effect is. As a result, it is possible to suggest predetermined information (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win) by the effect time of the action effect, so that the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
In addition, by making it possible to change the presentation time of the action presentation, it is possible to widen the range of the action presentation, so that the attraction of the presentation using the movable member 440 can be enhanced. Furthermore, by making it possible to change the effect time of the action effect, it is possible to change the effect time of other effects (for example, display effect) that are executed together with the action effect, so it is possible to expand the range of other effects. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance interest in not only the action presentation but also other presentations executed together with the action presentation.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means other than the movable member 440 is provided, and the effect time (t103 to t106) of the action effect can be changed according to the effect mode of the effect using the effect means. (See FIGS. 67(a) and (b)).
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect time (t103 to t106) of the action effect is the effect mode (effect time) of the effect (operation promotion effect) using the display device 41 and the effect button 25, that is, the effect button 25 can be changed according to the operation timing of
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect related to another effect (an effect using the effect means other than the movable member 440) as the motion effect. You can increase your interest.

Note that in the present embodiment, the execution time of the rotating motion of the performance time of the motion rendering (the performance of the character object performing the moving motion and the rotating motion) is changed according to the operation timing of the performance button 25. , but not limited to. For example, the execution time of the movement motion may be changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, or both the execution time of the movement motion and the execution time of the rotation motion may be changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25. You can let them do it.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the action effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute the action effect without executing the operation promotion effect. . That is, the action effect may be executed in relation to other effects, or may be executed without relation to other effects.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect time of the action effect is changed according to the operation timing of the effect button 25, but the present invention is not limited to this. effect, another effect performed during the action effect, and another effect performed after the action effect), the effect time of the action effect may be changed. Specifically, for example, an action effect may be performed during execution of a special figure variation display game in which reach occurs, and the effect time of the action effect may be increased as the degree of expectation for a big hit in the reach effect is higher. Furthermore, in addition to the normal pattern in which the higher the hit expectation for the ready-to-win performance is, the longer the performance time is selected, the ready-to-win performance is the ready-to-win performance (N reach) with the lowest expectation for the big hit, and the shortest performance time. A contradictory pattern (extreme heat pattern) in which a long motion presentation is selected may be provided.

Further, the action effect is not limited to the effect of moving action (moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the action position) and rotating action (rotating body 441 rotating). The action effect may be, for example, an effect of performing a moving motion (without performing a rotating motion), an effect of performing a rotating motion (without performing a moving motion), or a motion other than a moving motion and a rotating motion. It may be a production that performs the operation of.
Further, the action (predetermined action) executed immediately after the preparatory action (announcement action) is not limited to the action of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the action position. That is, the action executed immediately after the preparatory action may be the action of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (for example, the operating position), or the action of rotating the rotor 441. It may be any other operation.

<Modified example 1 of character production>
The performance control device 300 moves the movable member 440 from the initial position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 66(a)) to the operation position (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(b)), and a second role production in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to an intermediate position (a position between the initial position and the operating position). It may be executable. The intermediate position may be a position where the movable member 440 entirely overlaps the display area of the display device 41 or a position where a part of the movable member 440 overlaps the display area of the display device 41 .
In this modification, step C386 of the variable production setting process (Fig. 54) (lottery for the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation) and step C389 of the fluctuation production setting process (Fig. 54) (lottery for the notice that appears during the latter half fluctuation) ) will perform a lottery for the performance of the role. Then, if the character object production lottery is won at step C386, the character object production is executed during the first half fluctuation, and if the character object production lottery is won at step C389, the character object production is executed during the second half fluctuation. to run.

Specifically, the effect control device 300 performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a character effect lottery in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and wins the character effect lottery. In the case (when it is decided to execute the character production during the first half fluctuation), the production mode distribution table is referred to, and the character production to be executed during the first half fluctuation is set to the first character production or the second 2. A lottery for selection of performance mode is carried out for determining whether or not to use a role performance.
In addition, the effect control device 300, in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect lottery, and when winning the character effect lottery (second half When it is decided to execute the character production during the fluctuation), the production mode distribution table is referred to, and the character production to be executed during the second half fluctuation is set to the first role production or the second role. A performance mode selection lottery for determining whether to use a performance is performed.

Then, when the first role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery, display setting corresponding to the first role production is performed in step C394 of the variable production setting process (FIG. 54), and the variable production is performed. In step C396 of the setting process (FIG. 54), the sound number (the number indicating the type of presentation by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the board presentation device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration) corresponding to the first role product presentation A number indicating the type of effect by the device 18) is set.
Further, when the second role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery, display setting corresponding to the second role production is performed in step C394 of the variable production setting process (FIG. 54), and the variable production is performed. In step C396 of the setting process (FIG. 54), the sound number (the number indicating the type of presentation by the speakers 19a and 19b) and the decoration number (the board presentation device 44, the board decoration device 46, and the frame decoration) corresponding to the second role product presentation A number indicating the type of effect by the device 18) is set.

FIG. 70(b) shows an example of the production mode allocation table referred to when performing the production mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), regardless of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the ratio of executing the first role production during the first half fluctuation The probability of being selected) is lower than the ratio of executing the second role production during the first half variation (the probability that the second role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery of step C386). Therefore, in this modification, when the movable member 440 moves during the first half fluctuation, the case where the movable member 440 does not move to the operating position is better than the case where the movable member 440 moves to the operating position. many.

Also, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (other than a big hit), the performance of the character is not executed during the second half variation. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the probability of winning the role object effect lottery in step C389 is set to other than 0% (0% < winning probability < 100%), but the special figure variation If the displayed game is a loss (other than a big hit), the probability of winning the role object effect lottery of C389 is set to 0%. Therefore, in this modified example, the performance of the character is executed during the second half variation only when the result is a big hit, so the movement of the movable member 440 during the second half variation suggests the confirmation of the big win. can be done.

Furthermore, the ratio of executing the first role production during the second half fluctuation (the probability that the first role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery in step C389) is the ratio of executing the second role production during the second half fluctuation. (Probability that the second role object effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery of step C389).In the case of this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. The ratio of executing one role production (the probability that the first role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery at step C389) is set to 100%. In other words, the character object presentation that appears during the latter half variation is only the first character object presentation, and the second character object presentation is not executed during the latter half variation. Therefore, in this modified example, when the movable member 440 moves during the second half fluctuation, the movable member 440 always moves to the operating position.

Movable member 440 can perform a first movement operation of moving from an initial position to an intermediate position and a second movement operation of moving from an intermediate position to an operating position. In the first role production, the movable member 440 performs all the moving actions (the first moving action and the second moving action). , the player grasps how the movable member 440 moves in the first half of the variation. Therefore, interest in the movable member 440 cannot be maintained until the latter half of the fluctuation, and the interest in the latter half of the fluctuation is reduced. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the latter half of the fluctuation by configuring the character production to be executed only during the latter half fluctuation without executing the character production during the first half fluctuation. Since the movable member 440 does not move during the first half of the fluctuation, the interest in the first half of the fluctuation is reduced.

Therefore, in this modified example, during the first half variation, the ratio of executing the first role effect in which the movable member 440 performs all the moving motions is higher than that in which the movable member 440 performs only a part of the moving motions. It is configured so that the ratio of executing the object presentation is higher. By configuring in this way, the player is less likely to grasp how the movable member 440 moves in the first half of the variation, so it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the second half of the variation, and the movement can be made during the first half of the variation. Since the member 440 may move, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the first half of the fluctuation.

In addition, since it is sufficient that the ratio of executing the second role production during the first half fluctuation is higher than the ratio of executing the first role production, the first role production is not executed during the first half fluctuation (during the first half fluctuation It is also possible to configure such that only the second role production is used as the appearing role production). can be suppressed. However, by making it possible to execute not only the second role production but also the first role production during the first half variation, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the movable member 440 may move to the operating position. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest in the first half of the fluctuation. Therefore, in this modified example, not only the second role production but also the first role production can be executed during the first half variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the first performance, the movable member 440 does not stop at the middle position after performing the first moving motion of moving from the initial position to the middle position. to the operating position, and stops at the operating position for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 5 seconds). Then, when the first accessory effect ends (that is, after stopping at the operating position for a predetermined time), the movable member 440 returns to the initial position. Therefore, in the first character object presentation, since it only passes through the middle position and does not stop at the middle position, the staying time at the middle position is "0.1 second" in the example shown in FIG. .
In addition, in the second accessory effect, the movable member 440 performs the first moving motion of moving from the initial position to the intermediate position, and stops at the intermediate position for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). Then, when the second accessory effect ends (that is, after stopping at the intermediate position for a predetermined time), the movable member 440 returns to the initial position.

In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position (hereinafter referred to as "first half operating position stay time") in the first performance effect executed during the first half variation is Although it is set to 3 seconds, the first half operation position stay time is not limited to 3 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the operating position (hereinafter referred to as the “second half operating position staying time”) is set to 5 seconds in the first role product presentation executed during the latter half fluctuation, but the second half operating position staying time is set to 5 seconds. is not limited to 5 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Also, in the second performance, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the midway position (hereinafter referred to as the “first half midway position staying time”) is set to 3 seconds, but the first half midway staying time is limited to 3 seconds. can be changed as appropriate.

During the first half variation, more game information is displayed on the display device 41 than during the second half variation. Therefore, by shortening the first half motion position staying time (that is, the time during which the movable member 440 overlaps with the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 during the first half movement), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the game information. , in this modified example, the first half motion position stay time is shortened.
Also, the second half motion position staying time may be the same as the first half motion position staying time. However, in this modified example, the role production that appears during the second half fluctuation (the first role production that is executed during the second half fluctuation) is executed at the time of the big hit notification in the win-loss notification production, so the second half operation position staying time is used. Then, a predetermined presentation (for example, presentation in which the movable member 440 and the display device 41 are associated) is often executed. Therefore, by lengthening the second half motion position staying time, the effect of the predetermined effect can be enhanced. Therefore, in this modified example, the second half motion position staying time is set longer than the first half motion position staying time. .
That is, in this modification, by making the first half motion position stay time shorter than the second half motion position stay time, the visibility of the game information is suppressed in the first half of the variation, and the production effect of the predetermined presentation in the second half of the variation. It is compatible with the improvement of

The time required for movement from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different during the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation.
In addition, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first performance and the second performance.
Also, the time required for movement from the midway position to the operating position may be the same during the first half fluctuation and during the second half fluctuation, or may be different.

In addition, since it is sufficient that the ratio of executing the first role production is higher than the ratio of executing the second role production during the second half fluctuation, not only the first role production but also the second role production is performed during the second half fluctuation. may also be configured to be executable. In such a configuration, the time during which the movable member 440 stops at the middle position (hereinafter referred to as the “second half middle position stay time”) in the second role product presentation executed during the second half fluctuation can be selected as appropriate. For example, by making the second half midway position stay time longer than the first half midway position stay time, it is possible to suppress the decrease in visibility of game information in the first half of the fluctuation and to provide a predetermined effect (for example, the movable member 440 and the display device) in the second half of the fluctuation. 41) can be compatible with the improvement of the production effect.

In addition, in this modified example, during the period during which the character effect is being performed, the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is caused to emit light in a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous, and when the character effect is finished. During the period in which the movable member 440 returns to the initial position, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is configured to emit light in a light-emitting manner in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous.
An example of a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous is a light emission mode in which it blinks at a predetermined brightness (for example, maximum brightness).

Further, as an example of a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous, there is a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is lit at a lower luminance than that in a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is conspicuous (including a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is turned off). .
In addition, as an example of a light emission mode in which the movable member 440 is inconspicuous, there is a light emission mode in which the display color on the display device 41 and the same system color are lit. In this modified example, the character effect that appears during the second half variation is executed at the time of the big hit notification in the win-loss notification effect, so the return action is performed in which the movable member 440 returns to the initial position after the character effect ends. During this period, a rainbow-colored background image is often displayed on the display device 41 . If a rainbow-colored background image is displayed on the display device 41 while the movable member 440 is performing the return operation, the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is lit in rainbow colors. In this way, the color of the movable member 440 during the return operation (the light emission color of the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is made similar to the background color of the movable member 440 (color of the same family). Therefore, since the movable member 440 conforms to the surroundings, the return operation of the movable member 440 is less conspicuous.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 70(b), the probability of selecting the first role object effect during the first half variation is the same in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability of selecting the first character effect during the first half variation may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, or may be higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. may be lower. Further, in the case of a big hit, the probability of selecting the first role object presentation during the first half variation may be 0%. In the case of losing, the probability of selecting the first role performance during the first half variation may be 0%.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 70(b), the probability of selecting the second character effect during the first half variation is the same in the case of a big hit and in the case of a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability of selecting the second character effect during the first half variation may be higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, or in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. may be lower. However, in the case of a big hit, it is preferable that the probability of selecting the second role object effect during the first half variation is higher than the probability of selecting the first role object effect during the first half variation. In addition, in the case of losing, the probability of selecting the second role product effect during the first half variation is preferably higher than the probability of selecting the first role product effect during the first half variation.
In addition, the second role production may be executed during the second half variation, and in that case, the probability of selecting the second role production during the second half variation is the same in the case of a big hit and in the case of a deviation. It may be higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss, or it may be lower in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory production of Modification 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing the production using the movable member 440 in relation to the game, and the movable member 440 is A first effect (first role object effect) in which the first action (first moving action) and a second action (second moving action) are performed, and a second effect in which the movable member 440 performs the first action and does not perform the second action. 2 production (second role object production) can be executed, and at the first timing (during the first half fluctuation), the ratio of executing the first production is lower than the ratio of executing the second production, and the first timing At a second timing (during the latter half fluctuation) different from , the ratio of executing the first effect is configured to be higher than the ratio of executing the second effect (see FIGS. 70(a) and (b)). .

Therefore, it is unlikely that the player will grasp how the movable member 440 moves at the first timing (during the first half of the change), so it is possible to suppress the loss of interest at the second timing (during the second half of the change). Furthermore, since the movable member 440 may move not only at the second timing but also at the first timing, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the presentation using the movable member 440 .
In addition, in addition to the first production (first character production) in which both of the first action and the second action are performed, the second production (second character production) in which only one of the actions is performed is also executed. Since it is possible, the frequency of operation of the movable member 440 at the first timing can be increased. Therefore, since it becomes easy to notice a problem (failure, etc.) of the movable member 440, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the performance using the movable member 440 not being executed.

In addition, in this modified example, not only the second role production but also the first role production can be executed during the first half variation, but it is not limited to this. If the condition that the ratio of executing the first production (first character production) is lower than the ratio of executing the second production (second character production) at the first timing (during the first half fluctuation), for example , the first role object presentation may not be executed during the first half variation (only the second role product presentation may appear during the first half variation).
Further, in this modified example, the second role product presentation is not executed during the second half variation (only the first role product presentation appears during the second half variation), but the present invention is not limited to this. If the condition that the ratio of executing the first production (first character production) is higher than the ratio of executing the second production (second character production) at the second timing (during the second half fluctuation), for example , it may be configured such that not only the first role production but also the second role production can be executed during the second half fluctuation.
In addition, in this modification, in the special figure variation display game that does not result in a big hit, the character effect is not executed during the second half variation, but it is not limited to this. Even when the result is other than a big hit, it may be possible to execute the performance of the character during the second half variation.

Also, the first action is not limited to the action of moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the first operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (eg, intermediate position), or the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to another position (eg, operating position). It may be an operation to rotate, an operation in which the rotating body 441 rotates, or an operation other than that.
Also, the second motion is not limited to the second moving motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to the operating position. That is, the second operation may be an operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (eg, intermediate position), or the movable member 440 moves from the intermediate position to another position (eg, operating position). It may be a motion to rotate, a rotating motion in which the rotor 441 rotates, or other motions.
Also, the first timing is not limited to during the first half fluctuation. Also, the second timing is not limited to the second half fluctuation. For example, the first timing may be before the development to the SP reach during the second half fluctuation, and the second timing may be after the development to the SP reach during the second half fluctuation.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the role production of Modification 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing an action production (a role production) using the movable member 440 in relation to the game. The member 440 performs a first action (first movement action) to move to a first specific position (intermediate position) and a second action (second movement action) to move to a second specific position (action position). It is possible, and the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the first specific position is different from the first timing (during the change in the second half) in the action effect executed at the first timing (during the change in the first half). and the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the second specific position is longer in the action effect executed at the second timing than in the action effect executed at the first timing. (See FIG. 70(c)).

Specifically, in this modified example, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the midway position is set to 3 seconds in the second role product effect executed during the first half fluctuation, and is executed during the second half fluctuation. Since it is set to 0.1 seconds in the first role object presentation, the motion presentation executed during the first half variation is longer.
In addition, since the movable member 440 does not move to the operating position in the second role production, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position in the second role production is 0 second. Therefore, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position is set to 0 seconds in the second role production performed during the first half fluctuation, and is set to 5 seconds in the first role production performed during the second half fluctuation. Since it is set to , the action effect that is executed during the second half fluctuation is longer.
Furthermore, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position is set to 3 seconds in the first role performance performed during the first half variation, and is set to 5 seconds in the first role performance performed during the second half variation. Since it is set to , the action effect that is executed during the second half fluctuation is longer.

With this configuration, it is possible to reverse the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the specific position between the first timing and the second timing. As a result, the movement of the movable member 440 does not become monotonous, and an inflectional action effect can be executed within one variation, so that the interest in the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
Further, more game information is displayed on the display device 41 at the first timing (during the first half fluctuation) than at the second timing (during the second half fluctuation). Therefore, especially when the second specific position (operating position) overlaps with the central portion of the display area of the display device 41 as in this modified example, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the second specific position is By structuring such that the action effect executed at the first timing is shorter than the action effect executed at the second timing, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the game information.

In this modified example, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the middle position is set to be the same between the first role performance performed during the first half variation and the first role performance performed during the second half variation. but not limited to this. For example, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the midway position (first specific position) is that the first role production performed during the first half of the fluctuation (first timing) is during the latter half of the fluctuation (second timing). It may be configured to be longer than the first role product presentation to be executed.
Also, the first specific position is not limited to an intermediate position, and may be, for example, an operating position. Also, the second specific position is not limited to the operating position, and may be, for example, an intermediate position.
Also, the first timing is not limited to during the first half fluctuation. Also, the second timing is not limited to the second half fluctuation. For example, the first timing may be before the development to the SP reach during the second half fluctuation, and the second timing may be after the development to the SP reach during the second half fluctuation.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory production of Modification 1 is a gaming machine capable of executing the production using the movable member 440 in relation to the game, and is provided with the display device 41 and is movable. The member 440 is movable from a first position (initial position) to a second position (intermediate position, operating position), and is capable of emitting light. During (the period during which the return operation is performed), the light emission color of the movable member 440 (the light emission color of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) and the display color of the display device 41 are of the same type. can be configured as
With this configuration, the action (return action) in which the movable member 440 moves from the second position to the first position becomes less conspicuous, so that the entertainment using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the role object production of Modification 1 has the production time of the first production (first role production) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation), and the second timing ( For example, it can be constructed so that the effect time of the first effect executed in the latter half of the variation is different (see FIG. 70(c)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an intonation motion effect (character object effect) within one variation, so that the effect using the movable member 440 can be enhanced.
In the example shown in FIG. 70(c), the performance time of the first production (first character production) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) is changed to the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation). Although the effect time is shorter than the effect time of the first effect (first character effect) to be executed, it may be vice versa. In addition, the production time of the first production (first role production) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the first production (first role production) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) It may be the same as the production time of the object production).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70(c), the first effect (first character object effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) are executed. The performance time is made different by providing a difference in the staying time at the action position between the first performance (first character performance), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), a first effect (first character effect) executed at a first timing (for example, during the first half variation) and a second effect (for example, during the second half variation) executed at the second timing The performance time may be varied by providing a difference in the number of executions of the first movement motion for one performance (first accessory performance).

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the movable member 440 performs a first moving operation (moving from the initial position to the intermediate position) and a second moving operation (moving from the intermediate position to the operating position). In the first accessory production, a fanning production may be performed in which the first movement action is executed multiple times.
In the example shown in FIG. 70(d), in the first role production performed during the first half variation, the fan effect is performed, but in the first role product presentation performed during the second half variation, the fan effect is performed. Instead, the first movement motion is performed only once. In this way, by making the movement of the movable member 440 different between the first role production during the first half fluctuation and the first role production during the second half fluctuation, it is possible to improve the interest in the second half of the fluctuation. becomes.

The time required to move from the initial position to the middle position may be the same or different during the first half fluctuation (with agitation effect) and the second half fluctuation (without agitation effect).
In addition, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first performance and the second performance.
Also, the time required for movement from the midway position to the action position may be the same or different during the first half fluctuation (with fanning effect) and the second half fluctuating (no fanning effect).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the role product presentation of Modification 1, the first performance (first role product presentation) is the first action (for example, the first is an effect in which a second action (for example, a second movement action) is performed after performing a movement action), and the number of times the first action is performed is a first effect performed at a first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation), and a second effect. It can be configured to be different from the first effect executed at the timing (for example, during fluctuation in the second half) (see FIG. 70(d)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible not only to execute an intonation action effect (character object effect) within one variation, but also to change the movement of the movable member 440 to the first timing (for example, the first half variation). It is possible to make the first production (first role production) executed at the middle) and the first production (first role production) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) different. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the presentation using the movable member 440 .

In the example shown in FIG. 70(d), the number of executions of the first action (for example, the first moving action) in the first effect (first character product effect) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) is Although it is two times, the number of times the first action is executed in the first effect executed at the first timing is not limited to two times, and may be one time or two times or more. good.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70(d), in the first effect (first character effect) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation), the number of executions of the first action (for example, the first moving action) is Although it is described as one time, the number of times the first action is performed in the first effect performed at the second timing is not limited to one time, and may be multiple times.
Also, at one of the first timing and the second timing, the first action is performed (the number of executions of the first action is set to one or more), and at the other of the first timing and the second timing, the first action is performed. By not performing the action (setting the number of executions of the first action to 0) to provide a difference in the number of times the first action is executed, The performance time of one performance (first role performance) and the performance time of the first performance (first role performance) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70(d), the performance time of the first production (first character production) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) is changed to the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation). Although the effect time is longer than the effect time of the first effect (first character effect) to be executed, it may be vice versa. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 70(d), the number of executions of the first action (for example, the first movement action) is higher than that of the first effect executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) at the second timing ( For example, the number of the first effects that are executed during the second half fluctuation) is smaller, but the reverse is also possible. In addition, the production time of the first production (first role production) executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the first production (first role production) executed at the second timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) It may be the same as the production time of the object production).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70(d), the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position is the same between the first character effect during the first half fluctuation and the first character effect during the second half fluctuation. Yes, but not limited to. That is, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position is executed at the first timing (for example, during the first half variation) and the second timing (for example, during the second half variation). You may make it differ by the 1st production|presentation (1st character object production|presentation) performed. For example, at one of the first timing and the second timing, the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position is set to 0 second, so that the time during which the movable member 440 stays at the operating position is changed to the first timing (for example, the first half fluctuation It is also possible to make the first production (first role production) executed at the second timing (for example, during the fluctuation in the second half) different from the first production (first role production) executed at the second timing. .

Also, the character object presentation of Modification 1 can be appropriately combined with the character object presentation of the above-described embodiment.
Specifically, for example, similar to the character object production of the above-described embodiment, in the character object production of Modification 1 as well, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor Concealment effect (for example, effect of turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440, or displaying a blackout image G3 on the display device 41) for concealing the rattling motion (motion of slightly moving at a fixed position) that occurs along with the start of excitation. production, etc.) may be executed.

<Modified example 2 of character production>
The effect control device 300 provides a first role object effect in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the operating position via the intermediate position, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to execute not only the first role object effect in the mode (hereinafter referred to as "passing mode"), but also the first role effect in which the movable member 440 is temporarily stopped in the middle position (hereinafter referred to as "stopped mode"). can be
In addition, in this modification, the character production may be executed during the first half fluctuation, may be executed during the second half fluctuation, or may be executed from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation. can be

If the character effect is an effect that can be executed during the first half variation, for example, in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect is performed. and when winning the lottery for the performance of the character (when it is determined to execute the performance of the performance), the performance mode apportionment table is referred to, and the performance of the performance to be executed is the first performance of the halfway mode. A performance mode selection lottery is carried out for determining whether to perform the performance, the first role performance of the halfway stop mode, or the second role performance.
Further, when the character effect is an effect that can be executed during the second half variation, for example, in step C389 of the change effect setting process (FIG. 54), the character effect lottery and the effect mode selection lottery are performed.
In addition, if the character effect is an effect that can be executed from the first half fluctuation to the latter half change, for example, in step C386 of the change effect setting process (FIG. 54), the character effect lottery and the effect mode selection lottery I do.
In addition, in this modification, the probability that the midway passage mode is selected in the production mode selection lottery (the total selection rate of the midway passage mode) is changed to the probability that the midway stop mode is selected in the production mode selection lottery (the total of the midway stop mode). selectivity), but is not limited thereto, and the total selectivity in the midway pass mode may be lower than the total selectivity in the midway stop mode, or may be the same as the total selectivity in the midway stop mode. can be

FIG. 71(b) shows an example of the production mode allocation table referred to when performing the production mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), if the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (other than a big hit), the ratio of executing the first role production in the midway pass mode (midway in the performance mode selection lottery) The ratio of executing the first role production of the halfway stop mode (probability of selecting the first role production of the halfway stop mode in the production mode selection lottery) is higher than the probability that the first role performance of the passing mode is selected. ) is lower, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the ratio of executing the first role performance of the midway passage mode (in the performance mode selection lottery, the first role performance of the midway pass mode is The ratio of executing the first performance of the halfway stop mode (probability of selecting the first performance of the halfway stop mode in the performance mode selection lottery) is higher than the probability of selection). Therefore, in this modified example, by executing the first role production of the halfway stop mode, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of the big win is higher than the case of executing the first role production of the midway passage mode. can.

Furthermore, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the ratio of executing the second role production (the second role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery) The probability that it will be done) is 0%. Therefore, in the present modification, the second role production is executed only when the result is a loss (other than a big hit). It can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when executing
That is, in the present modification, the expected value (big hit expectation) from which the special result mode is derived is in the order of the second role performance<the first role performance of the midway pass mode<the first role performance of the midway stop mode. It's getting higher.

For example, when the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of the second role production < the first role production in the midway stop mode < the first role production in the midway pass mode, or the first role performance in the midway stop mode < the first role performance If the second role effect is higher than the first role effect of the midway passage mode, the player's sense of expectation will decrease when the movable member 440 stops at the midway position. In addition, when the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of the first role production of the midway passage mode < the second role production < the first role production of the halfway stop mode, or the first role production of the midway passage mode < midway In the case where the first performance of the stop mode is higher than the second performance of the performance, the player's expectation drops when the movable member 440 passes the midway position (when the movable member 440 does not stop at the midway position). Resulting in.

On the other hand, when the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of the second character effect<the first character effect of the midway passage mode<the first character effect of the midway stop mode, the movable member 440 stops at the midway position. At the time point, it is determined whether the character production being executed is the character production with the highest expectation for a big hit (the first character production in the halfway stop mode) or the character production with the lowest expectation for the big hit (the second character production). Since it is unclear whether it is a performance or not, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for the movable member 440 to stop at an intermediate position. Furthermore, in this case, the first role object presentation in the midway passage mode is not the role product presentation with the lowest degree of expectation for big wins, but the degree of expectation for big wins is medium. It is also possible to suppress the decline in expectations for

As described above, the gaming machine 10 capable of executing the accessory effect of the modification 2 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. A game machine that includes a first effect (first character effect) in which a movable member 440 moves to an operating position, and a second effect (second character effect) that is partially common to the first effect. The effect mode of the first effect includes a first effect mode (intermediate passage mode) in which the movable member 440 moves to the operating position without stopping at a specific position (intermediate position), and a first effect mode (intermediate passage mode) in which the movable member 440 There is a second effect mode (intermediate stop mode) in which the movable member 440 stops at a specific position and then moves to the operating position. When the result is not a special result (big hit), the ratio of executing the first effect is lower than the ratio of executing the second effect, and when the result of the game is the special result, the first effect is performed in the second effect mode. The ratio of executing the effect is configured to be higher than the ratio of executing the first effect in the first effect mode (see FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b)).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectations for the movable member 440 to stop at the specific position (intermediate position) and a decrease in expectations for the movable member 440 to pass the specific position (intermediate position). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the presentation using the movable member 440 .
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 71(b), it is configured such that the second role product effect is not executed in the special figure variation display game that results in a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the degree of expectation for a big win satisfies the condition that the degree of expectation for a big hit rises in the order of the second character effect<the first character effect in the midway pass mode<the first character effect in the midway stop mode, the result is not the big win. Instead, even when the result is a big hit, the second role product presentation may be executable.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 71(b), the probability that the first role effect of the halfway stop mode is selected in the case of a big hit and the probability that the second role effect is selected in the case of a loss are different. Although they are the same, they may be different. In the case of a big hit, the probability that the first performance of the halfway stop mode is selected may be 0% or 100%. In addition, the probability that the second character effect is selected in the case of losing may be 0% or 100%.

In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the operating position is set to 5 seconds in the first performance of the halfway passage mode. It is not limited to seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the motion position in the first role product presentation of the midway passage mode may be the same as or different from the motion position in the first role product presentation of the midway stop mode. Further, the motion position in the first role production of the halfway passage mode may be the same as the middle position in the first role production of the halfway stop mode, or the same as the middle position in the second role production. Also good.

Also, in the first role product presentation of the halfway stop mode, the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the operating position is set to 5 seconds, but the time is not limited to 5 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the motion position in the first role product presentation of the halfway stop mode may be the same as or different from the motion position in the first role product presentation of the midway passage mode. In addition, the motion position in the first performance of the halfway stop mode may be the same as the midway position in the first performance of the midway passage mode, or the same as the midway position in the second performance of the second performance. Also good.

In addition, in the second accessory presentation, the time for the movable member 440 to stop at the intermediate position is set to 3 seconds, but the time is not limited to 3 seconds and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the midway position in the second role product presentation may be the same as or different from the midway position in the first role product presentation of the midway passage mode. Further, the midway position in the second role product presentation may be the same as or different from the action position in the first role product presentation in the midway passage mode.
Further, the midway position in the second role product presentation may be the same as or different from the midway position in the first role product presentation in the midway stop mode. Further, the midway position in the second role product presentation may be the same as or different from the action position in the first role product presentation in the midway stop mode.

Further, the time required for movement from the initial position to the halfway position may be the same or different between the halfway passage mode and the halfway stop mode.
In addition, the time required for moving from the initial position to the intermediate position may be the same or different between the first performance and the second performance.
Further, the time required for movement from the midway position to the operating position may be the same or different between the midway passage mode and the midway stop mode.

Also, the character object presentation of Modification 2 can be appropriately combined with the character object production of the above-described embodiment and the character object production of Modification 1.
Specifically, for example, similar to the character object production of the above-described embodiment, in the character object production of Modification 2 as well, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor Concealment effect (for example, effect of turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440, or display of a blackout image G3 on the display device 41) for concealing the rattling motion (motion that slightly moves at a fixed position) that occurs along with the start of excitation. production, etc.) may be executed.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(c), similar to the character object production of the modified example 1, also in the character object production of the modified example 2, the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the first timing different from the first timing. It is also possible to make it executable at both of the two timings (for example, during the fluctuation in the second half), and to make the selection rate of each performance mode of the character performance different between the first timing and the second timing.

<Modified example 3 of character production>
The effect control device 300 operates the movable member 440 as a role object effect by moving the movable member 440 from the initial position (for example, the position shown in FIG. A first role product effect in which the movable member 440 moves to an operating position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 66(b); hereinafter referred to as a “first operating position”), and a second role product effect in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to an intermediate position. In addition, it is possible to execute a third role production in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the second action position (for example, a position farther from the initial position than the first action position) via the intermediate position and the first action position. It can be.

In this modified example, the first moving motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the midway position is a motion suggesting that there is a high likelihood that reach will occur, and is performed during the first half of the fluctuation.
In addition, the second moving motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the middle position to the first motion position is a motion suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation that the SP reach will develop, and is performed during the latter half of the fluctuation.
Further, the third moving motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the midway position to the second operating position is also a motion suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation that the SP reach will develop, and is performed during the latter half of the fluctuation.

Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, in step C386 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), performs a character effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the character effect lottery, and wins the character effect lottery. (when it is decided to execute the character production), the production mode allocation table is referred to, and whether the character production to be executed is the first character production or the second character production. A performance mode selection lottery for determining whether to use the third accessory performance is performed.
The role production lottery for the special figure fluctuation display game where the reach occurs has a higher probability of winning than the role production lottery for the special figure fluctuation display game where the reach does not occur, and the special figure where the reach does not occur The character object effect lottery for the variable display game is set to have a higher probability of losing than the character object effect lottery for the special figure variable display game in which reach occurs. Therefore, in this modified example, execution of the character effect (movement of the movable member 440) can suggest that the likelihood of occurrence of reach is high.

FIG. 72(b) shows an example of the production mode allocation table referred to when performing the production mode selection lottery.
For example, as shown in FIG. 72(b), when reach does not occur in the special figure variation display game, the ratio of executing the second role production (the probability that the second role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery ) is set to 100%. That is, when the reach does not occur, the first performance and the third performance are not executed (even if the movable member 440 moves, it does not move to the first operating position or the second operating position). there is As described above, the second movement operation and the third movement operation are actions that suggest that the expectation of developing into SP reach is high, so if there is no possibility of developing into SP reach (if reach does not occur ), neither the first role effect of performing the second moving motion nor the third role effect of performing the third moving motion is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72(b), for example, the higher the expected level of the generated ready to hit the jackpot, the lower the ratio of execution of the second character effect, while the higher the expected level of the generated ready to hit the jackpot. The more, the higher the ratio of execution of the first role production and the third role production. Therefore, in this modified example, by executing the first role production and the third role production (the movable member 440 crosses the middle position), there is a possibility that the SP reach with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit will develop. can suggest high.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(b), when the SP reach (SP3 reach) with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit occurs, the ratio of executing the third role production (the third role in the production mode selection lottery) The probability that the object effect is selected) is the ratio of executing the first role effect (the probability that the first role effect is selected in the effect mode selection lottery) or the ratio of executing the second role effect (effect mode selection probability of selecting the second performance effect by lottery). Therefore, in this modification, by executing the third role production, there is a possibility that it will develop into an SP reach with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit, compared to the case where the first or second role production is executed. can be suggested to be high.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 72(b), the higher the degree of expectation for the big hit of the generated reach, the higher the ratio of execution of the first character effect and the third character effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
That is, all the reach is the probability that the first role production is selected in the production mode selection lottery when the reach occurs>In the production mode selection lottery when the reach with a lower expected jackpot than the reach occurs The condition of the probability that the first role production will be selected, the probability that the first role production will be selected in the production mode selection lottery when the reach occurs <when the reach with a higher expectation for a big hit than the reach occurs Although the condition of the probability that the first accessory performance is selected in the performance mode selection lottery is satisfied, there may be reach that does not satisfy these conditions among the plurality of reach. Specifically, for example, the selection rate of the first character object effect may be configured to be 15% for N reach, 20% for SP1 reach, 15% for SP2 reach, and 30% for SP3 reach.
By constructing in this way, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is low, the player can enjoy the SP reach by executing the performance with impact by the movable member 440, so that the interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, all reach is the probability that the third role effect is selected in the production mode selection lottery when the reach occurs>In the production mode selection lottery when the reach with a lower expected jackpot than the reach occurs The condition of the probability that the third role production will be selected, the probability that the third role production will be selected in the production mode selection lottery when the reach occurs <when the reach with a higher expectation for a big hit than the reach occurs Although the condition of the probability that the third accessory performance is selected in the performance mode selection lottery is satisfied, there may be a reach that does not satisfy these conditions among the plurality of reach. Specifically, for example, the selection rate of the third character effect may be configured to be 5% for N reach, 20% for SP1 reach, 10% for SP2 reach, and 40% for SP3 reach.
By constructing in this way, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is low, the execution of impactful performance by the movable member 440 makes it possible for the player to enjoy the SP reach, which reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Also, the third role product effect may be a big win confirmation effect suggesting that the result will be a big win. That is, the third role product presentation may be executed only when the result is a big win.
Alternatively, different information may be suggested depending on the light emitting mode of the movable member 440 (the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) during execution of the third role product presentation. Specifically, for example, when the movable member 440 reaches the second operating position, the light emission mode of the movable member 440 is changed to the first light emission mode (for example, yellow), thereby developing SP reach. Suggesting that, by setting it to the second light emission mode (e.g. red), it suggests that SP reach will develop, and by setting it to the third light emission mode (e.g. rainbow color), the result will be a big hit You can do it.

Also, the character effect of Modification 3 can be appropriately combined with the character effect of the above embodiment, the character effect of Modification 1, and the character effect of Modification 2.
Specifically, for example, similar to the character object production of the above-described embodiment, also in the character object production of the third modification, the preparatory operation for moving the movable member 440 from the initial position to another position (that is, the stepping motor Concealment effect (for example, effect of turning off the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440, or displaying a blackout image G3 on the display device 41) for concealing the rattling motion (motion of slightly moving at a fixed position) that occurs along with the start of excitation. production, etc.) may be executed.

Further, for example, in the same way as the character production of Modification 3, in the character production of Modification 1 and the character production of Modification 2, the selection rate of each production mode of the character production may differ depending on the type of reach that occurs. You can allow it.
Further, in the same way as in the character production of Modification 1, in the character production of Modification 3 as well, at both the first timing (for example, during the first half fluctuation) and the second timing different from the first timing (for example, during the second half fluctuation) In addition to being executable, the selection rate of each effect mode of the character object effect may be made different between the first timing and the second timing.
Further, the character object effects of the above-described embodiment and the character object effects of Modifications 1 to 3 may be effects in which movable means other than the movable member 440 are operated. As a movable means other than the movable member 440, for example, one end side is supported by a rotation shaft, and by rotating around the rotation shaft, the other end side is positioned at an initial position (for example, it does not overlap the display area of the display device 41). position) to an operating position (for example, a position overlapping the display area of the display device 41).

In addition, in the character object production of the above embodiment and the character object productions of Modifications 1 to 3, the time to stay at the initial position, the time to stay at the intermediate position, the time to stay at the action position, the time from the initial position to the intermediate position Each time, such as the time required for movement and the time required for movement from the intermediate position to the operating position, can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or longer. Also, the duration of staying at the initial position, the duration of staying at the intermediate position, and the duration of staying at the operating position may all be the same, all may be different, or only part of them may be different. good. Also, the time required for movement from the initial position to the intermediate position and the time required for movement from the intermediate position to the operating position may be the same or different.
In addition, in the character object production of the above-described embodiment and the character object productions of Modifications 1 to 3, the selection rate of each production mode of the character object production is in the range of 0% to 100% (including 0% and 100%). ) can be changed as appropriate. Also, the selection rate of each effect mode of the character object effect may be all the same, all may be different, or only a part may be different.

<Luminous effect>
The effect control device 300 can execute a light emission effect of switching the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 . In this embodiment, during the execution of the first ready-to-win effect (for example, N-reach), a light-emitting effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit and the degree of expectation to develop into another ready-to-win effect is executed, and the second ready-to-reach effect (for example, SP ready-to-win) is executed. ), a light-emitting effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the light emission effect, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched from the normal light emission mode to the specific light emission mode.

Effect control device 300, for example in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), performs the first light emitting effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute the light emitting effect during the execution of the first reach effect.
The first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game that results in a big hit has a higher probability of winning than the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game that results in a result other than a big hit, and the result is The first light emission lottery for special figure fluctuation display games other than big hits has a higher probability of losing than the first light emission production lottery for special figure fluctuation display games where the result is a big hit. is set. Furthermore, the probability of winning the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game in which the SP reach occurs is higher than the first light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game in which the SP reach does not occur, The first light emission lottery for special figure fluctuation display games in which SP reach does not occur has a higher probability of losing than the first light emission production lottery for special figure fluctuation display games in which SP reach occurs. is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by executing the light emitting effect during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing into SP reach is high) ) can be suggested.

In addition, the effect control device 300, for example in step C389 of the variable effect setting process (Fig. 54), performs a second light emitting effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the light emitting effect during the execution of the second reach effect.
The second light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game that results in a big hit has a higher probability of winning than the second light emission effect lottery for the special figure variation display game that results in a result other than a big hit, and the result is The second light emission lottery for special figure fluctuation display games other than big hits has a higher probability of losing than the second light emission production lottery for special figure fluctuation display games where the result is a big hit. is set. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one type of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high) can be suggested by executing the light emitting effect during execution of the second ready-to-win effect.

An example of the lighting effects will be described with reference to FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the special figure variation display game that wins the first light emission effect lottery and the second light emission effect lottery starts, and as shown in FIG. 73(b), for example, when reach occurs, For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), at the start of the first ready-to-win effect, the luminescence mode of the luminous member provided on the movable member 440 changes from the normal luminescence mode in which the light is lit in white to the specific luminescence mode in which the light is lit in red. switch. Thus, it is possible to suggest two kinds of information (information indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high and information indicating that the degree of expectation for developing SP reach is high). In the example shown in FIG. 73, as the first ready-to-win effect, the effect of whether or not the development pattern stops is performed. When the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the specific light emission mode, an image of the display mode corresponding to the specific light emission mode (for example, a red serif image G5) is displayed on the display device 41. can be

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(d), for example, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 returns to the normal light emission mode. In addition, the timing when the light emission mode returns from the specific light emission mode to the normal light emission mode can be selected as appropriate. It is good, and it may be at the end of the first ready-to-win effect (that is, after the result as to whether or not the development pattern is stopped is known). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the development pattern is stopped, but of course, even if the light emission effect is performed during the execution of the first reach effect, the development pattern does not stop (that is, it does not develop into SP reach) )In some cases.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(e), when the second reach effect starts, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 changes from the normal light emission mode in which the light is lit in white to the started second reach effect. is switched to a luminous mode suggesting the type of . For example, when the started second reach effect (SP reach) is SP1 reach, it switches from white to blue, when it is SP2 reach, it switches from white to yellow, and when it is SP3 reach, it changes from white to green. switch to The effect suggesting the type of the second ready-to-win effect that has started (the effect in which the light emission mode of the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440 switches to the light-emitting mode that suggests the type of the second ready-to-win effect that has started) is, for example, A lottery for determining whether or not to execute the effect is performed in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 54), and the lottery is executed when the lottery is won.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(f), for example, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 returns to the normal light emission mode. In the example shown in FIG. 73, as the second ready-to-win effect, a battle effect is performed in which a friendly character fights an enemy character.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(g), for example, in the middle of the second ready-to-win production, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 changes from the normal light emission mode in which the light is lit in white to the specific light emission mode in which the light is lit in red. mode. Thereby, one type of information (information that the expectation of a big hit is high) can be suggested. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 is switched to the specific light emitting mode, the image of the display mode corresponding to the specific light emitting mode (for example, the red serif image G5) is displayed on the display device 41. can be Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 73(f), the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be a specific light emission mode in which the light is lit in red. In that case, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be switched from the light emission mode suggesting the type of the second ready-to-win effect that has been started to the specific light emission mode without returning to the normal light emission mode, The light emission mode suggesting the type of the second ready-to-win effect that has been started may return to the normal light emission mode, and immediately after that, the light emission mode may be switched to the specific light emission mode.

Further, by switching to the specific light emission mode at the time shown in FIG. 73(f), specific information different from the information that the expectation of a big win is high (for example, information that a teammate character will make a preemptive attack) is suggested. Also good. In that case, the specific information is suggested by switching to the specific light emission mode, and after temporarily returning to the normal light emission mode, the character image "Preemptive!" It may be possible to suggest information that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by switching to the lighting mode. Alternatively, the specific light emission mode is switched to the specific light emission mode to suggest the specific information, the specific light emission mode is maintained as it is, and the character image "Preemptive!" It is also possible to suggest information that the degree of expectation for a big win is high.

Then, when it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second ready-to-win effect will result in a big hit (when the ally character wins), for example, as shown in FIG. At that time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 switches from the specific light emitting mode of lighting in red to the jackpot notification mode of lighting in rainbow colors. This can suggest that the result will be a big hit.
In addition, when it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second ready-to-reach effect will not result in a big hit (when the ally character loses), the movable member 440 is provided with a The light-emitting mode of the light-emitting member returns from the specific light-emitting mode of lighting in red to the normal light-emitting mode of lighting in white. This can suggest that the result will not be a big hit.

Note that in the present embodiment, the white light emission mode is the normal light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal light emission mode can be changed as appropriate. The normal light emission mode may be, for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.
Further, in the present embodiment, the red light emission mode is the specific light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the specific light emission mode is not limited to this, and the specific light emission mode can be changed as appropriate. The specific light emission mode may be, for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.
Also, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of lighting in rainbow colors is the jackpot notification mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, but the jackpot notification mode is not limited to this, and the jackpot notification mode can be changed as appropriate. The jackpot notification mode may be, for example, a light emission mode in which the light is turned off.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing an effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) in relation to the game. A specific effect (light emitting effect) can be executed by means, and the specific effect executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) is the first information (the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is expected to be a big hit degree) and second information (expectation level that develops into another ready-to-win effect), and the specific effect executed at a second timing (during execution of the second ready-to-win effect) different from the first timing is the first Information can be suggested, but second information cannot be suggested (see FIG. 73).
Therefore, the information suggested by the specific effect differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (the light-emitting member provided on the movable member 440), so that the interest in the effect using the effect means can be enhanced. .

The first information is not limited to the degree of expectation that the result of the special figure variation display game will be a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the second information is not limited to the degree of expectation that develops into another ready-to-win effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
Also, the first reach effect is not limited to N reach. The first ready-to-win effect may be, for example, a weak SP ready-to-win with a low degree of expectation, or may be an SP ready-to-win first half effect appearing in the first half of the SP ready-to-win.
Also, the second ready-to-win effect is not limited to SP ready-to-win. The second ready-to-win effect may be, for example, a highly anticipated strong SP ready-to-win effect, or may be an SP ready-to-win latter half effect that appears in the latter half of the SP ready-to-win game.

Further, the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) may be effect in which the effect means blinks in a predetermined color (for example, red). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing SP reach is high) are suggested by blinking the production means in red during execution of the first ready-to-win production. In addition, the effect means may indicate one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big win is high) by blinking red during execution of the second ready-to-win effect.
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) is the effect of blinking in a predetermined color (for example, red), for example, as shown in FIG. The flickering period may be different between the execution of the 1 reach performance and the execution of the second reach performance.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the light emitting means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), the specific effect is the effect of blinking the light emitting means, and the light emitting means emits light. The color is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect), and the light emission The blinking period of the means can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74(a)).
By configuring in this way, not only does the information suggested by the specific effect differ depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), but also the blinking cycle depends on the timing. Since they are different, the player can easily recognize that the indicated information is different due to the difference in blinking period.

In the example shown in FIG. 74(a), the blinking period during execution of the first reach effect is longer than the blinking period during execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa good.
Also, the flashing period during execution of the first ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or more.
Also, the flashing cycle during execution of the second ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or longer.
In addition, instead of differentiating the blinking period between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times of blinking (including 0 times) may be changed. , the cumulative time for light emission at a predetermined brightness (for example, maximum brightness) (predetermined brightness light emission cumulative time, including 0 seconds) may be varied, or the cumulative time for light emission with a predetermined color (for example, red) (predetermined color light emission cumulative time) may be varied. time (including 0 second) may be different.
In the example shown in FIG. 74(a), the red light emission accumulated time during the execution of the first reach effect is longer than the red light emission accumulated time during the execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. can be
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 74(a), when the second ready-to-win effect starts, an effect that suggests the type of the started second ready-to-win effect (for example, the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided in the movable member 440 is changed to the start Although the effect of switching to the light emission mode suggesting the type of the second reach effect) is not executed, it may be executed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 74(a), when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second ready-to-win effect is determined (when the battle effect is won or lost), the movable member 440 is provided with If the light emission mode of the light emitting member returns to the normal light emission mode (for example, the light emission mode that lights up in white), but it is confirmed that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed in the second reach effect will be a big hit ( When the teammate character wins), the light emission mode of the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440 may be switched to a big hit notification mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) at the time of confirmation.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440) in relation to the game, and the specific effect is , the effect means repeats a predetermined mode (lighting and extinguishing), and the predetermined mode includes a specific effect executed at a first timing (during execution of the first ready-to-win effect) and a second timing different from the first timing. (During execution of the second ready-to-win effect) is the same as the specific effect executed at (during execution of the second ready-to-win effect), and the repetition cycle of the predetermined mode is the same for the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. , can be configured differently (see FIG. 74(a)).
By configuring in this way, since the repetition cycle differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the effect means. .
Note that the effect of repeating the predetermined mode is not limited to the effect of alternately repeating lighting and extinguishing (blinking effect), for example, lighting in a first color (eg white) and lighting in a second color (eg red). and may be alternately repeated.
Further, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440, and may be light emitting means other than the light emitting member provided on the movable member 440. FIG.

Moreover, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting means, and may be the movable member 440, for example. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which the movable member 440 performs a predetermined motion (for example, the first movement motion). That is, by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the middle position during the execution of the first reach effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and SP reach information that the degree of expectation for development is high), and one type of information (for example, a big hit) by performing the first moving motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the middle position during the execution of the second ready-to-win effect. (information indicating that the degree of expectation of the customer is high).

Also, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect in which the movable member 440 repeats a predetermined motion (for example, the first movement motion). That is, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and SP information that there is a high expectation that it will develop into reach), and one type of information is obtained by performing the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position a plurality of times during the execution of the second reach performance. (For example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high) may be suggested.
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effect means is an effect in which the movable member 440 repeats a predetermined motion (for example, the first movement motion), the first ready-to-win effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 74(b). The repetition cycle may be different between during execution and during execution of the second ready-to-win effect.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the movable means (movable member 440), the specific effect is an effect in which the movable means repeats a predetermined action (for example, the first movement action), and the predetermined action is the same as the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second reach effect), and the predetermined operation can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74(b)).
By configuring in this way, not only does the information suggested by the specific effect differ depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440), but also the repetition cycle differs depending on the timing, so that the player can , it is possible to easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the repetition period.

Note that the predetermined motion is not limited to the first movement motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the predetermined motion may be a motion in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position or an operating position), or may be a motion in which the rotor 441 rotates. Other operations may be used.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 74(b), the repetition period during execution of the first ready-to-win effect is longer than the repetition period during execution of the second ready-to-win effect, but vice versa good.
Also, the repetition period during execution of the first ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or longer.
Also, the repetition period during execution of the second ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or longer.
In addition, instead of differentiating the repetition cycle between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of repetitions (including 0 times) may be different. , the cumulative time for which the movable member 440 stays at a predetermined position (for example, an intermediate position) (predetermined position stay cumulative time, including 0 second) may be varied. In the example shown in FIG. 74(b), the halfway position stay cumulative time during execution of the first ready-to-win effect is longer than the halfway position stay cumulative time during execution of the second ready-to-win effect, but vice versa. can be

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440) in relation to a game, and the specific effect is performed by the effect means in a predetermined mode. (For example, the first movement action) is an effect that repeats, and the predetermined mode is a specific effect that is executed at the first timing (during the execution of the first reach effect) The specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing are different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. (see FIG. 74(b)).
By configuring in this way, since the repetition period differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (movable member 440), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the effect means.
Note that the predetermined mode is not limited to the first movement operation in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position. That is, the predetermined mode may be an action in which the movable member 440 moves from the initial position to another position (for example, an intermediate position or an operating position), an action in which the rotor 441 rotates, or both. Other operations may be used.
Also, the rendering means is not limited to the movable member 440, and may be a movable means other than the movable member 440. FIG.

Moreover, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting means or the movable means, and may be the display device 41, for example. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying a predetermined image (for example, the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character) on the display device 41 . For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), during the execution of the first ready-to-win effect, a line image G5 of the friendly character (for example, a text image "Stop the development pattern!" and a balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. . Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(g), even during execution of the second ready-to-win effect, a dialogue image G5 (for example, a character image saying "Preemptive!!!" and a balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. be done. That is, by displaying the line image G5 of the friendly character on the display device 41 during the execution of the first ready-to-win effect, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and the expectation of developing SP reach) are displayed. In addition, one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big win is high) is suggested by displaying the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character on the display device 41 during execution of the second ready-to-win performance. You can make it work.
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effect means is the effect of displaying the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character on the display device 41, the first ready-to-win effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 74(c), for example. The accumulated time (accumulated dialogue image display time) for displaying the dialogue image G5 of the teammate character on the display device 41 may be different between when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the display means (the display device 41), and the specific effect is the effect of displaying the dialogue image G5 of the predetermined character (teammate character) on the display means. The character is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first ready-to-reach effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second ready-to-reach effect), and the dialogue image The accumulated display time (accumulated dialogue image display time) obtained by accumulating the time for displaying G5 can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing. (See FIG. 74(c)).
By configuring in this way, not only does the information suggested by the specific effect differ depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (display device 41), but also the cumulative display time (cumulative dialogue image display time) depends on the timing. ) are also different, the player can easily recognize that the suggested information is different due to the difference in the accumulated display time.

Note that the predetermined character is not limited to an ally character, and may be an enemy character, or may be both an ally character and an enemy character.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 74(c), the display cumulative time during execution of the first reach effect is shorter than the display cumulative time during execution of the second reach effect, but vice versa. can be
Also, the accumulated display time during execution of the first ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or more.
Also, the accumulated display time during execution of the second ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or more.
In addition, instead of differentiating the accumulated dialogue image display time between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times the dialogue image G5 is displayed (number of appearances: 0 times) ) may be varied, and when the dialog image G5 is displayed periodically, the period (including 0 second) may be varied.

Also, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying an image other than the dialogue image G5 on the display device 41 . Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of displaying a character image G6 of a predetermined character (for example, an ally character) on the display device 41 . That is, by displaying the character image G6 of the teammate character on the display device 41 during the execution of the first ready-to-win effect, two kinds of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and the expectation of developing SP reach) are displayed. The character image G6 of the teammate character is displayed on the display device 41 during execution of the second ready-to-win performance, thereby suggesting one type of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big win is high). You can make it work.
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effect means is the effect of displaying the character image G6 on the display device 41, the display device 41 The cumulative time for displaying the character image G6 (accumulated character image display time, including 0 seconds) may be varied, or the number of times the character image G6 is displayed (the number of appearances, including 0 times) may be varied. However, when the character image G6 is displayed periodically, the period (including 0 second) may be varied.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using display means (display device 41) in relation to a game, and the specific effect is a first This is an effect for displaying an image (character image G6 of an ally character) and a second image (a dialogue image G5 of an ally character), and the first image is executed at a first timing (during execution of the first reach effect). The specific effect and the specific effect executed at a second timing (during execution of the second ready-to-win effect) different from the first timing are the same, and the cumulative display time (speech) obtained by accumulating the time to display the second image The accumulated image display time) can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing (see FIG. 74(c)).
By configuring in this way, since the cumulative display time (accumulated dialogue image display time) differs depending on the timing of executing the specific rendering using the display means (display device 41), the attraction of the rendering using the display means can be enhanced. can be done.

The first image is not limited to the character image G6 of the friend character, and may be, for example, the character image G6 of the enemy character, the character images G6 of the friend character and the enemy character, or a dialogue. It may be the image G5.
Further, the second image is not limited to the dialogue image G5 of the friendly character, and may be, for example, the dialogue image G5 of the enemy character, the dialogue image G5 of the friendly character and the enemy character, or the character image G5. It may be the image G6.
Moreover, the rendering means is not limited to the display device 41, and may be display means other than the display device 41. FIG.

Also, the rendering means is not limited to the light emitting means, the movable means, and the display means, and may be, for example, the speakers 19a and 19b. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound (for example, the voice of a teammate character) from the speakers 19a and 19b. For example, as shown in FIG. 73(c), during the execution of the first ready-to-win effect, a line image G5 of the friendly character (for example, a text image "Stop the development pattern!" and a balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. However, at that time, the friendly character's dialogue sound (for example, "Stop the development pattern!") may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(g), even during execution of the second ready-to-win effect, a dialogue image G5 (for example, a character image saying "Preemptive!!!" and a balloon image surrounding it) is displayed. However, at that time, the friendly character's dialogue sound (for example, a voice saying "It's the first goal!!!") may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. In other words, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and the expectation that the SP reach will develop) are output by outputting the dialogue sound of the friend character from the speakers 19a and 19b during the execution of the first reach production. while suggesting one kind of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big win is high) by displaying the dialogue sound of the ally characters from the speakers 19a and 19b during execution of the second ready-to-win performance. You can make it work.
Further, when the specific effect using the effect means is the effect of outputting the sound of lines of the friendly characters from the speakers 19a and 19b, for example, as shown in FIG. The accumulated time (accumulated dialogue sound output time) for outputting the dialogue sound of the teammate character from the speakers 19a and 19b may be different between when the second ready-to-win effect is being executed.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect means is the sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b), and the specific effect is an effect of outputting the speech sound of a predetermined character (teammate character) from the sound output means. , the predetermined character is the same in the specific effect executed at the first timing (during execution of the first ready-to-win effect) and the specific effect executed at the second timing (during execution of the second ready-to-win effect); An output accumulated time (accumulated dialogue sound output time) obtained by accumulating the time for outputting the speech sound is configured to be different between the specific performance executed at the first timing and the specific performance executed at the second timing. (See FIG. 74(d)).
By configuring in this way, not only does the information suggested by the specific effect differ depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the effect means (speakers 19a and 19b), but the cumulative output time (accumulated dialogue sound output) depends on the timing. time) are also different, the player can easily recognize that the implied information is different due to the difference in the accumulated output time.

Note that the predetermined character is not limited to an ally character, and may be an enemy character, or may be both an ally character and an enemy character.
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 74(d), the cumulative output time during execution of the first ready-to-win effect is shorter than the cumulative output time during execution of the second ready-to-win effect, but vice versa. can be
Also, the cumulative output time during execution of the first ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or longer.
Also, the cumulative output time during execution of the second ready-to-win effect can be appropriately changed within a range of 0 seconds or longer.
In addition, instead of differentiating the dialogue sound output cumulative time between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing, for example, the number of times the dialogue sound is output ) may be varied, and when the dialogue sound is output periodically, the period (including 0 second) may be varied.

Also, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of outputting effect sounds other than dialogue sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b. Specifically, the specific effect using the effect means may be an effect of outputting a specific sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Quinn!") from the speakers 19a and 19b. That is, by outputting a specific sound effect from the speakers 19a and 19b during execution of the first ready-to-win production, two types of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big hit is high and information that the expectation of developing into SP reach is high) information), and by outputting specific sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b during execution of the second ready-to-win performance, one kind of information (for example, information that the expectation of a big win is high) is suggested. Also good.
Furthermore, when the specific effect using the effect means is the effect of outputting the specific effect sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the speaker 19a , 19b, the cumulative time for outputting the specific sound effect (the cumulative time for outputting the specific sound effect) may be varied, the number of times the specific sound effect is output (the number of appearances) may be varied, or the specific sound effect may be cycled. In the case of outputting in a uniform manner, the period may be varied.
Also, the effect means is not limited to the speakers 19a and 19b, and may be sound output means other than the speakers 19a and 19b.

Also, the first timing is not limited to the execution of the first ready-to-win effect. Also, the second timing is not limited to the execution of the second ready-to-win effect. For example, the first timing may be during the first half fluctuation, and the second timing may be during the latter half fluctuation.
In addition, a specific effect using light emitting means (see FIG. 74(a)), a specific effect using movable means (see FIG. 74(b)), a specific effect using display means (see FIG. 74(c)), Specific effects using sound output means (see FIG. 74(c)) can be applied in combination as appropriate.

Also, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect using display means (display device 41) and sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b) in relation to a game. , the specific effect is a effect of displaying a specific image (character image G6 of the ally character) on the display means and outputting a specific sound (speech sound of the ally character) from the sound output means; The specific effect executed at the first ready-to-reach effect) and the specific effect to be executed at the second timing (during the second ready-to-reach effect) different from the first timing are the same, and the specific sound is played. The accumulated output time (accumulated dialogue sound output time) obtained by accumulating the output time can be configured to be different between the specific effect executed at the first timing and the specific effect executed at the second timing ( See FIG. 74(d)).
By configuring in this way, since the output cumulative time (line sound output cumulative time) differs depending on the timing of executing the specific effect using the display means (display device 41) and the sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b), the display It is possible to enhance the interest of performance using the means and the sound output means.

The specific image is not limited to the character image G6 of the friend character, and may be, for example, the character image G6 of the enemy character, the character images G6 of the friend character and the enemy character, or a dialogue image. It may be G5.
Further, the specific sound is not limited to the dialogue sound of the ally character. For example, it may be a sound effect such as "Quinn!".

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

10 game machine 19a, 19b speaker (production means, sound output means)
25 production button (operation means)
38 1st special variable winning device (variable winning device)
39 Second special variable winning device (variable winning device)
41 display device (production means, display means)
44 board production device (movable production device)
46 board decoration device (light emitting device)
100 game control device (preliminary determination means, setting means)
300 production control device (display control means)
440 movable member (directing means, movable means)
G2 Operation promotion image G5 Dialogue image

Claims (2)

In a game machine capable of executing an effect using a movable member in relation to a game,
Equipped with a display device that can display effects,
the movable member is capable of executing a predetermined operation and capable of emitting light;
The light emission mode of the movable member differs between a first period during which the movable member performs the predetermined operation and a second period preceding the first period and continuing from the first period,
The movable member slightly moves during the second period ,
In the gaming machine , the luminescent color of the movable member and the display color of the display device are of the same system during the second period . The production using the movable member includes an action production in which the movable member executes the predetermined action,
The action effects include a first effect in which the movable member moves from a first position to a second position and then a second action is executed, and a second action is executed after the first action is executed. There is a second production that does not
The action effect can be executed during a predetermined period during the game in which the identification information is changed, and a specific period during the game and after the predetermined period,
Among the games, in a game in which an advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs, the second effect is executed more frequently than the first effect in the predetermined period, and the second effect is executed in the specific period. The ratio of execution of the first effect is higher than that of the second effect,
The gaming machine includes a luminous decorative body ,
the decoration is provided near the movable member positioned at a predetermined position in the second period;
the movable member is operable in front of the display device and is capable of executing a specific operation during a third period after the first period;
2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display mode of the display device differs between the first period and the second period.

Images